JP2017213239A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving a taste.SOLUTION: During execution of a prescribed performance (e.g., a normal performance such as an under-variation performance) for displaying a prescribed image (e.g., a normal performance image such as performance symbols and a background), a game machine can execute a specific image performance (e.g., a pseudo light guide plate performance) in which a specific image (e.g., a pseudo light guide plate image) is superimposedly displayed on a front side (e.g., a display layer for a pseudo light guide plate as a layer with a higher display priority than that of a normal display layer for displaying a normal performance image) of a prescribed image in a state (e.g., a state where the prescribed image is covered by a mask) where visibility of the prescribed image is lowered. Further, the game machine can display the specific image in such a mode that at least parts of a first image and a second image different from the first image are superimposed with each other, where image display priority of the second image is set higher compared with that of the first image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine capable of playing a game.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, a variable display area capable of variably displaying the identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the variable display area becomes the specific display result, the game state (game There is a machine configured to give a predetermined game value to a player by changing the state of the machine (specifically, the state where the gaming machine is controlled) (so-called pachinko machine).

  In addition, after setting a predetermined number of bets for one game on a predetermined game medium, the player starts variable display of identification information by the variable display area by operating the start lever, and the player By operating a stop button provided corresponding to the display area, the variable display of the identification information is stopped within the range of the maximum delay time determined in advance from the operation timing, and the variable display of all the variable display areas is displayed. In accordance with the display result derived when the game is stopped, a winning occurs, a predetermined game medium determined in advance according to the winning is paid out, and when a specific winning occurs, a player is given a predetermined gaming value as a gaming state. There is one that is configured to be in a state to be given to (so-called slot machine).

  The game value means that a prize ball is paid out or that the state of a variable winning ball device provided in a gaming area of a gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball, or advantageous for a player. For example, to generate a right to enter a state, or to enter a state in which a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of effect symbols (identification information) that starts in the variable display area based on the winning of the game ball at the start winning opening. If this happens, a “big hit” will occur. The derived display is to finally stop and display a symbol (final stop symbol). When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times of opening the special winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round. A game in a round may be referred to as a round game.

  In the variable display area, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left middle right symbol) continue for a predetermined period of time and stop and shake in a state that matches the specific display result. It can be a big hit before the final result is displayed because it is moving, scaling, or deforming, or multiple symbols change synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the displayed symbol is switched. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach state”) is referred to as a reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as “reach mode”. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is referred to as “reach variable display”. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed in the variable display area is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variability display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Some of these gaming machines include a light guide plate on the front surface (player side) of the effect display device and execute an effect by the light guide plate (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-14559 A (FIGS. 22 and 62)

  However, in the gaming machine described above, since the display pattern of the light guide plate is fixed, the production is restricted and the entertainment is insufficient.

  Then, an object of this invention is to provide the gaming machine which can improve interest.

  (Means 1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and is specially provided in a plurality of stages of production modes (for example, first to fourth production modes, see FIG. 92) having different expectations. A special effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes step S908108) capable of executing an effect (for example, an effect effect) and a display mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, a first image (for example, a part where the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes step S908108)). A display means capable of displaying a second effect (e.g., active display or hold display) different from the first image by a plurality of display modes having different expectations. For example, an effect display device 909) and a predetermined effect (for example, a normal effect such as a changing effect) that displays a predetermined image (for example, a normal effect image such as an effect symbol or a background). ) In a state in which the visibility of the predetermined image is lowered (for example, the state in which steps S3703 and S3708 are performed), the specific image (for example, the pseudo light guide plate image) is displayed on the front side of the predetermined image. (For example, a pseudo light guide plate effect display layer that is superimposed on a display layer having a higher display priority than a normal display layer that displays a normal effect image). Specific image effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps S3704 and S3709 of the effect control microcomputer 100), and the display means at least partially includes the first image and the second image. The second image can be displayed in an overlapping manner (see FIGS. 96 and 97), and the second image has a higher priority for image display than the first image (see FIG. 6, see FIG. 97), wherein the identification information on the front side of the specific image (e.g., the fourth symbol can display small symbols).

  According to such a structure, interest can be improved. In addition, the player can be prevented from being confused.

  In other embodiments described later, the “special effect execution means” may be simply referred to as “effect means”, and the “special effect” executed by the special effect execution means may be referred to as “specific effect”. Further, the “first image” may be referred to as “corresponding image”, and the “second image” may be referred to as “predetermined image”.

  (Means 2) In the means 1, the specific image effect executing means puts the mask on the predetermined image so as to reduce the visibility of the predetermined image (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs step S3703). S3708 can be executed).

  According to such a configuration, the effect of producing the specific image effect can be improved.

  (Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the specific image effect executing means can execute a specific image effect in which the opacity of the specific image is switched a plurality of times (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is a data processor). By using the image data of the pattern A, it is possible to execute a pseudo light guide plate effect in which the opacity is switched a plurality of times in one layer of the frame 5 to the frame 15. Also, by using the image data of the data pattern C, the frame 24 to the frame It is possible to perform a pseudo light guide plate effect in which the opacity is switched a plurality of times in one layer of 35 and one layer of frames 50 to 75. Also, by using image data of the data pattern D, one layer of frames 22 to 25 , One layer and two layers of frame 29 to frame 35, frame 38 to frame 43 It is also possible to execute a pseudo light guide plate effect in which the opacity is switched a plurality of times in the first layer to the third layer, the first layer to the fourth layer of the frame 48 to the frame 53, and the first layer to the fifth layer of the frame 60 to the frame 68). .

  According to such a configuration, the effect of producing the specific image effect can be improved.

  (Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the specific image effect executing means can execute a specific image effect that displays a specific image having a resolution lower than that of the predetermined image (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). Can display the effect image of the normal effect having a resolution of 96 ppi (pixel per inch) and the effect image of the pseudo light guide plate effect having the resolution of 48 ppi (see FIG. 41 (B3)). It is good as well.

  According to such a configuration, the effect of producing the specific image effect can be improved.

  (Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the specific image effect executing means can execute a specific image effect in which a plurality of images to be superimposed are displayed as a specific image (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 is By using the image data of the data patterns A to D, it is possible to execute a pseudo light guide plate effect that displays a pseudo light guide plate image in a plurality of layers (base and 1 layer to 5 layers) having different display priorities) It is good as well.

  According to such a configuration, the effect of producing the specific image effect can be improved.

  (Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the specific image effect executing means can execute the specific image effect at a plurality of timings (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the first pseudo light guide plate effect). The pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed at the execution timing T1 and the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2.

  According to such a configuration, the effect of producing the specific image effect can be improved.

  (Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the specific image effect executing means can execute the specific image effect with different effect patterns based on the display color of the specific image (for example, an effect control microcomputer). 100 may be determined in steps S2804 and S2811 based on the color tone (blue, red, rainbow) (PT1 to PT4).

  According to such a configuration, the effect of producing the specific image effect can be improved.

  (Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, an effect adjustment (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, etc.) relating to a game according to a player's action (for example, operation of the stick controller 122, predetermined action of the player, etc.) Mode switching), and the adjustment status of the production adjustment (for example, the volume adjustment status, the brightness adjustment status, the mode switching status, etc.) can be displayed when the production adjustment is performed. For example, in a pachinko machine, it is in a gaming state other than in the super reach effect, or in a state waiting for a customer and not displaying an error, and in a slot machine in a game state other than in the continuous effect or in a customer waiting state. In an error display state or the like, the adjustment status is displayed in a visible manner regardless of the player's action (for example, the production control microcomputer 100). The volume adjustment status is displayed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the execution of the volume status display process (see FIG. 46), etc.), and is in a state different from the first state and a specific effect (for example, a supermarket in a pachinko game machine). In the second state (for example, a game state during a super reach effect on a pachinko machine, a game state during a continuous effect on a slot machine, etc.) in which a reach effect, a continuous effect on a slot machine, etc. It is impossible to visually recognize (for example, the volume adjustment status is not displayed on the effect display device 9 in accordance with the execution of the processing such as step S614 by the effect control microcomputer 100), and a predetermined condition is established based on the player's action. (For example, based on the operation of the stick controller 122, etc. Situation may be only such as is displayed) that a predetermined time period to the effect display device 9.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to display the adjustment status of the effect adjustment according to the player's request while suppressing a decrease in the effect of the specific effect, and to improve the interest of the game.

  (Means 9) In any one of the means 1 to 8, the detection means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, an abnormal winning in the gaming control microcomputer 560 of the modified example 1 (for example, a big winning opening when the big hit is not being made) The specific image effect executing means includes an abnormality notification image on the front side of the specific image during the execution of the specific image effect. May be displayed (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 of the first modification may display an abnormality notification indicating that an abnormality has occurred on the special display layer of the production display device 9).

  According to such a configuration, the effect of producing the specific image effect can be improved.

  (Means 10) In any one of the means 1 to 9, there is provided a launching means (for example, a hitting ball launching device) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) toward the game area, and the specific image effect executing means includes: During execution of the specific image effect, a first path in the game area (for example, a path in which game balls launched on the substantially left side of the game area 7 in Modification 2 flow down, and is provided with a first start winning opening 13. A first path) and a second path different from the first path (for example, a path through which a game ball launched to substantially the right side of the game area 7 in Modification 2 flows down, the gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14 An instruction notification image (for example, an instruction notification image) instructing to which of the game media is to be fired can be displayed on the front side of the specific image (for example, in a high base state). smell An instruction notification image (so-called right-handed notification image) for instructing the launch of the game ball on the second route is displayed on the special display layer of the effect display device 9 or the first period is a predetermined period after switching to the low base state. An instruction notification image for instructing the launch of a game ball on the route may be displayed on the special display layer of the effect display device 9).

  According to such a configuration, the effect of producing the specific image effect can be improved.

  Moreover, the form which implements the invention mentioned later includes the invention concerning the following means 11 to means 17. Conventionally, in gaming machines, the priority of display data for displaying effect symbols and notice effects as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-252383 is determined, and frames are displayed in order from the lowest priority. There is known a gaming machine that displays a frame image to generate a frame image. In this gaming machine, a plurality of images are displayed in a superimposed manner by generating frame images by displaying them on the frames in order from the display data with the lowest priority. However, by displaying in a manner in which a plurality of images are superimposed, the player may misunderstand the contents indicated by each image and be confused. In view of this point, it is desired to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from being confused.

  (Means 11) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine that performs a game, and has a plurality of stages of production modes (for example, first to fourth production modes. FIG. 92). Special effects (referred to as “specific effects”) (for example, “effect effects”) that can execute special effects (referred to simply as “effect means”) (for example, effect control micro) The computer 90100 can display a first image (sometimes referred to as “corresponding image”) (for example, an effect effect effect image) in a display mode corresponding to a specific effect, and a part in which step S908108 is executed. Display means capable of displaying the second image (sometimes referred to as “predetermined image”) (for example, active display or hold display) in a plurality of display modes having different expectations. An effect display device 909), and the display means can display the first image and the second image in such a manner that at least a part thereof is superimposed (see FIGS. 96 and 97). The image display priority is set higher than that of one image (see FIGS. 96 and 97).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

  (Means 12) A game machine that performs variable display (for example, variable display of special symbols and effect symbols) in the means 11, and stores a variable display that has not started yet as a hold memory (for example, a hold A storage buffer), and the display means can display a hold image (for example, a first hold display or a second hold display) corresponding to the hold storage stored in the hold storage means as the second image. It may be configured.

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the reserved image can be ensured.

  (Means 13) A gaming machine that performs variable display in the means 11 or 12, wherein the display means displays a variable display corresponding image (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed as the second image. It may be configured to be possible.

  According to such a configuration, the visibility of the variable display-compatible image can be ensured.

  (Means 14) In any one of the means 11 to 13, the first image has higher transparency than the second image (for example, the effect effect effect image is more transparent than the active display and the hold display). The degree may be high).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect.

  (Means 15) Any one of the means 11 to 14 may be configured to include an operable movable body (for example, a movable member 9090 with an effect LED that can be rotated) as the effect means.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect.

  (Means 16) In any one of the means 11 to 15, the game machine can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and is controlled to the advantageous state. Determining means for determining whether or not (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 90560 executes step S9061) and determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state prior to the determination of the determining means ( For example, effect execution means for executing an effect using the game control microcomputer 90560 using steps S901217A and S901217B) and an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 99, 100, etc.) The effect executing means includes a first effect image (for example, a scan effect) as a notice effect executed based on the determination by the determining means. 1st notice effect (for example, step-up notice effect etc.) using the up-up notice effect image and the like, and the second effect image (for example, chance zone effect image) as the notice effect to be executed based on the determination by the determining means. The second notice effect to be used (for example, the chance zone effect) can be executed, and the first effect image and the second effect image have different image display priorities (for example, as shown in FIG. 101, Z The chance zone effect image having the value “7” may be configured to be displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image having the Z value “8”).

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed.

  (Means 17) In any one of the means 11 to 16, an effect execution means for executing an effect using an effect image (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 99, 100, etc.) is provided. The execution means uses a first effect (for example, a chance zone effect) using a first effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) in the first area (region of image size “small” as shown in FIG. 100C). Etc.) and a second effect using a second effect image (for example, a group notice effect image or the like) in a second region (region of image size “large” as shown in FIG. 100B) wider than the first region. (For example, a group notice effect or the like) can be executed, and the first effect image and the second effect image have different image display priorities (for example, as shown in FIG. 101, the Z value is “6”). The group notice effect image is a Z value “7” Suzon effect is displayed on the front side of the image) may be configured so.

  According to such a configuration, the effect image can be suitably displayed.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which the microcomputer for game control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the big hit classification determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the presentation control command which the microcomputer for game control transmits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop process in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end process in the special symbol process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in an effect display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the concept of the layer structure in an effect display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a pseudo light guide plate effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows a pseudo | simulation light-guide plate effect execution lottery table, a color tone determination lottery table, an effect pattern determination lottery table, and an effect pattern table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the data pattern A and the data pattern B. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of a data pattern C. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a data pattern D. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a data pattern D. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change in effect control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an image data table. It is a timing chart which shows the execution timing of a pseudo light guide plate effect. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in a light guide plate effect, and the example of a display in a pseudo | simulated light guide plate effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in a light guide plate effect, and the example of a display in a pseudo | simulated light guide plate effect. It is explanatory drawing shown about the specific example of a display in a pseudo light guide plate effect. It is explanatory drawing shown about the specific example of a display in a pseudo light guide plate effect. It is explanatory drawing shown about the specific example of a display in a pseudo light guide plate effect. 10 is a flowchart showing a volume status display process in Modification 3. 10 is a flowchart showing a temporary display process in Modification 3. The example of the production | presentation in the case of volume change operation in the super reach fluctuation display in the modification 3 is shown. It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a display change timing determination table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of an accessory effect determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the active display change effect at the time of a fluctuation | variation start, an effect effect, and an effect effect effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of an active display, a hold display, and an accessory effect effect image. It is a figure which shows an example of Z value etc. of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is a figure which shows an example of various images. It is the conceptual diagram which represented the layer of various images typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an effect display apparatus.

  Hereinafter, an example of an embodiment of a gaming machine will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling or soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game or battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game or battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same.

  Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, it is displayed in the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the deviation). The For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is probable jackpot or normal jackpot). Also, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. Even if the number of rounds per jackpot is the same, for example, the jackpot opening time per round is short (for example, 1 second), and a jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball in the jackpot. If the opening time of the big prize opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big prize opening substantially, to the big prize opening substantially The display color may be varied depending on whether or not a game ball can be expected to win. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that cannot be expected and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, The display color may be varied depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win the mouth.

  When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, it is displayed in a display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol (a display color different from the disparity). The For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, while it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. Note that the display color may be varied depending on the type of jackpot (whether it is probable jackpot or normal jackpot). Also, the display color may be different depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win a big winning opening, and if it is possible to control multiple types of big hits with different numbers of rounds, The display color may be changed according to the number of rounds continued in the game. Even if the number of rounds per jackpot is the same, for example, the jackpot opening time per round is short (for example, 1 second), and a jackpot that cannot be expected to win a game ball in the jackpot. If the opening time of the big prize opening per round is long (for example, 30 seconds) and there is a big hit that can be expected to win a game ball to the big prize opening substantially, to the big prize opening substantially The display color may be varied depending on whether or not a game ball can be expected to win. In addition, for example, when there is a big hit that cannot be expected and a big hit that cannot be expected due to the difference in the number of times the big winning opening is opened per round, The display color may be varied depending on whether or not the game ball can be expected to win the mouth.

  The display colors when the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off are different from the background image (for example, black) in order to prevent the display colors from being assimilated with the background image when the lights are turned off. It is desirable to be.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 8a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be won at the second start winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold memory display 18b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first hold memory number (the hold memory is also referred to as start memory or start prize memory). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. ing. In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display section for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that are not satisfied with the variable display start condition.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided below the variable winning ball apparatus 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and is specified when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when a specific display result is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Controlled to gaming state. The specific display result is a predetermined display result. For example, in this embodiment, there is a jackpot symbol. The specific game state is to change the variable winning means that can be changed between the first state advantageous to the player and the second state unfavorable to the player to the first state. There is a big hit gaming state in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 that can be changed to a closed state is opened. For example, when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the specific display result, the big hit game state is controlled as the specific game state. In each specific game state, the open / closed version that is in the closed state is controlled to be in the open state by the solenoid 21, so that the large winning opening that becomes the winning area is in the open state. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display 10 for variably displaying normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the normal symbol display 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Moreover, the small display is formed in, for example, a square shape. Note that the normal symbol display 10 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) of, for example, 00 to 99. In addition, the normal symbol display 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decoration lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying “O” and “X”). It may be comprised.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (a winning symbol, for example, a symbol “7”), the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is high (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of fluctuation display of special symbols is increased compared to the normal state). Then, there is a case where the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is shifted to a high base state where the opening time and the number of times of opening are increased.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken. In addition, four speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right and lower left and right outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 4R probability variation big hit is reached, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball becomes easy to start winning (that is, the special symbol indicators 8a, 8b, A transition is made to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the variable display execution condition in the effect display device 9 is easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, by changing to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and staging symbols is shortened, the variation time of special symbols and staging symbols is shortened. The frequency at which the production symbol changes is increased (in other words, the reserved memory is quickly digested), and the situation in which an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design). The voice synthesis IC 703 generates a voice and outputs the voice to the speaker 27 when a predetermined request is received from the effect control board 80.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 560 becoming high level. It is. When the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes a high level, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 executes a security check process that is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. The main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, an interrupt mode for maskable interrupts is set (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set for the stack pointer (step S3). In step S2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the game control microcomputer 560 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is Set to the mode indicating the interrupt address. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Next, the built-in device register is set (initialized) (step S5). By the processing in step S5, the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits) are set (initialized).

  The game control microcomputer 560 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) 504.

  Next, the CPU 56 sets the RAM 55 in an accessible state (step S6), and proceeds to a clear signal check process.

  Note that a software delay process for delaying the start timing of the game device control process (game control process) for controlling the progress of the game by software may be executed. By such software delay processing, the start timing of the game control processing can be delayed as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. When the delay process is executed, a situation occurs in which the microcomputer of the other control board cannot receive the command transmitted from the game control board (main board 31) to the other control board (for example, the payout control board 37). Can be prevented.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the clear switch is turned on (step S7). Note that the CPU 56 may confirm the state of the clear signal only once via the input port 0, but may confirm the state of the clear signal a plurality of times. For example, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is an off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 seconds), the state of the clear signal is reconfirmed. If it is confirmed that the clear signal is in the on state at that time, it is determined that the clear signal is in the on state. Further, at this time, if it is confirmed that the state of the clear signal is the off state, after a delay time of a predetermined time, the state of the clear signal may be confirmed again. Here, the number of reconfirmations is not limited to once or twice, but may be three or more times. It is also possible to check twice and check again when the check results do not match.

  If the clear switch is not turned on in step S7, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) has been performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirm (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, a process for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 56 determines that the power supply stop processing has been performed, that is, the control state at the time of power supply stop is stored. . When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process is not performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process.

  Whether or not the power supply stop process has been performed is determined by the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process corresponding to the execution of the power supply stop process (for example, 2). ) Is confirmed by whether or not. Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop process, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that the power supply is stopped, it may be determined that the power supply stop process has been performed.

  If it is determined that the control state at the time of stopping power supply is stored, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the CPU 56 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area may be different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the process of steps S10 to S14) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped is stopped. Run.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), This is a portion where data indicating the number of payout prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the predetermined data may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a special symbol process flag, a winning ball flag, a ball-out flag, and the like are selectively processed according to the control state. An initial value is set in a flag for performing the above.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board. Processing is executed (step S14). As an initialization command, a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9, an initialization command to the payout control board 37, or the like can be used.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initially setting the random number circuit 503 (step S15).

  Then, the CPU 56 executes a timer interrupt setting process for setting a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms) ( Step S16). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the timer interrupt setting is completed, the CPU 56 first disables the interrupt (step S17), executes the initial value random number update process (step S18a) and the display random number update process (step S18b), The interrupt is permitted again (step S19). That is, the CPU 56 sets the interrupt disabled state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are executed, and interrupts enable state when the initial value random number update process and the display random number update process are finished. To.

  The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (for example, a jackpot symbol determining random number for determining a special symbol for generating a jackpot or whether to shift the gaming state to a probable state) Initial value of the count value such as a counter (determination random number generation counter) for generating a probability variation determining random number for generating, a normal random number for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol It is a random number for determining the value. A game control process described later (a process in which a game control microcomputer controls itself a game device such as an effect display device 9, a variable winning ball device 15, a ball payout device 97 provided in the gaming machine, or When the count value of the determination random number generation counter makes one round in a process of transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control, or a gaming apparatus control process), an initial value is set in the counter.

  The display random number is a random number for determining the display of the special symbol display 8. In this embodiment, as a display random number, a random number for determining a variation pattern for determining a variation pattern of a special symbol, or a random number for determining a reach for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not generated, is used. Used. The display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.

  In addition, when the display random number update process is executed, the interrupt disabled state is executed by the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process also in the timer interrupt process described later (that is, the timer This is because the same process is executed in steps S26 and S27 of the interrupt process), so as to avoid conflict with the process in the timer interrupt process. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S18a and S18b and the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt is prohibited during the processing of steps S18a and S18b.

  Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, in a period during which interruption is permitted during execution of the loop process of steps S17 to S19, the CPU 56 of the game control microcomputer 560 A timer interrupt process that is activated in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the CPU 56 first executes a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether the power-on signal is turned on) (step S20). Then, the CPU 56 inputs detection signals of switches such as the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 through the switch circuit 58, and detects the input of each switch. (Switch process: Step S21). Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes display control processing for performing display control of the special symbol display 8, the normal symbol display 10, the special symbol hold storage display 18, and the normal symbol hold storage display 41 (step S22). For the special symbol display 8 and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S36 and S37.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning notification process for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning at the special winning opening and notifying the abnormality (step S24).

  After step S24, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control (determination random number update process: step S25). ). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number (initial value random number update process: step S26). Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (display random number update process: step S27).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S28). In the special symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. Further, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S29). In the normal symbol process, the corresponding process is selected and executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the special symbol to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect symbol command control process: step S30). It should be noted that the fact that the variation of the effect symbol is synchronized with the variation of the special symbol means that the variation time (variable display period) is the same.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as a start port signal supplied to the hall management computer, a symbol determination number 1 signal, a symbol determination number 2 signal, a jackpot 1 to 3 signal, a time reduction signal, and the like. (Step S31).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S32). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In addition, a test terminal process, which is a process for outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the gaming machine to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed (step S33). In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 outputs the contents related to the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port 0 to the output port. (Step S34: Output processing). And CPU56 performs the memory | storage process which checks the increase / decrease in a pending | holding memory | storage number (step S35).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S36). Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S37).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a status display lamp display process for setting status display control data for displaying each status display lamp in an output buffer for setting the status display control data (step S38). In this case, when the gaming state is also controlled to a high probability state (for example, a probability variation state), the state display control data for displaying the state indicator lamp indicating the high probability state is set in the output buffer. You may make it do.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S39), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S39 (excluding steps S31 and 33) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) when the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used in the case where the reach is not performed and the pseudo-ream effect is performed. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Further, the variation pattern of non-reach PA1-2 used when not reaching is a variation pattern for shortening variation, and the variation time of the effect design is shortened to a short time (3.0 seconds in this example). . Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2-3 to normal P2-3 as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol. Variation patterns of PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4 are prepared.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 6, when using normal PB2-3 among the fluctuation patterns accompanied with the effect of a pseudo-continuous, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, which will be described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In step S25 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, it is decided to make a big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 4R probability variation big hit, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol.

  FIGS. 8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131 a and 131 b stored in the ROM 54. Among these, FIG. 8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 8C shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on a random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, the jackpot type is set to “15R probability variable big hit”, It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of “4R probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, 10 determination values are assigned to “15R probability variation big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). Is determined to be a 15R probability variation jackpot at a rate of 10), whereas 30 judgment values are assigned to the “15R probability variation jackpot” in the jackpot type determination table 131b (ratio of 30/40) Will be described as 15R probability variation big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, the start prize is given to the second start prize port 14 and the second special symbol is displayed rather than the case where the first special symbol variation display is executed after the start prize is given to the first start prize slot 13. When the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “15R probability variation big hit” is higher.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, there are “15R probability variation big hit” and “4R probability variation big hit” as big hit types. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and four rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is shown in this embodiment. It can't be limited to things. For example, there may be provided a 10R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 10 round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 7 round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled to 5 round jackpot game. In this embodiment, the case where there are two types of jackpot types, “15R probability variation jackpot” and “4R probability variation jackpot”, is not limited to two types, but for example, three or more types of jackpot types are provided. You may do it. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than two types, for example, only one type may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “15R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the big round gaming state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Are also migrated). Then, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), the probability variation state and the time reduction state are continued. Hereinafter, the gaming state controlled to the probability variation state and the short time state may be referred to as a “high probability high base state”, and the state that is not controlled to any of the probability variation state and the short time state may be referred to as a “low probability low base state”. .

  “4R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a four-round big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state is finished. Are also migrated). Then, until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (50 times), the probability variation state and the time reduction state are continued.

  In the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, numerical values to be compared with a random value of 1, and determination values (big hit type determination values) corresponding to each of “15R probability variation big hit” and “4R probability variation big hit” are set. ing. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  FIG. 9 and FIG. 10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each variation pattern that can be used, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of the effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the type of big hit. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display results of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 to A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying a fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of a big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, either a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command is used. Specifically, if it is “15R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and if it is “4R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) ) Is used.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round.

  The commands A301 (H) and A302 (H) display a jackpot end screen, that is, an effect control command for specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command, a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending) 2 designation command). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “15R probability variable big hit” is ended. The big hit end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “4R probability variable big hit” is ended.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control micro computer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol whenever there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the change pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (change) and second special display of the effect symbol corresponding to the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 detects that the first start port switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 13 or that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14. If the second start opening switch 14a is turned on, that is, if a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred, the start opening switch passing process is performed. Execute (Steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S307 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S307 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the big hit flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the completion of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. Further, a process for setting a flag (for example, a probability variation flag) indicating a gaming state is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1217. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1217.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 13) (step S1215). . In the process of step S1215, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are not extracted and stored in advance in the storage area in the start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning). You may make it extract at the time of the change start of 1 special symbol. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from a variation pattern type determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) in a variation pattern setting process to be described later, A value may be directly extracted from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a determination random number (random 3).

  FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 13, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1216).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in an on state (step S1217). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 (step S1218). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1219), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1220). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 13) (step S1221). . In the process of step S1221, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S222).

  14 and 15 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating “second” (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command. Further, if the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  In this embodiment, the background designation command is transmitted every time for each variation. For example, it is determined at the start of the variation whether or not the gaming state has changed since the previous variation. Only when the state changes, the background designation command corresponding to the changed gaming state may be transmitted. With such a configuration, the number of transmissions of the background designation command can be reduced, and the processing burden on the game control microcomputer 560 can be reduced.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect symbol command control process (step S30). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer in the order of the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the reserved memory number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. 100 will be transmitted. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage count subtraction designation command is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S307 can be shared between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in steps S1215 and S1221 of the start port switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with a jackpot determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, this is a program for executing the big hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state). Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are changed There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set to be smaller than the big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When in the gaming state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S62. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. When the big hit is decided, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped. Is reset at a timing to end or 50 times of special symbol variation display.

  If the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S66 as it is.

  In step S62, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S63). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8B. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8C.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variable big hit”, “ 4R probability variation jackpot ") is determined as the jackpot type (step S64). In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot type determination random number extracted in steps S1215 and S1221 of the start port passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer and the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. .

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S65). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “4R positive variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S66). Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set, “−” as a special symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when “15R probability variation big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “4R probability variation big hit” is determined, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S67).

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines which of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types according to the big hit type. Is selected (step S92). Then, control goes to a step S98.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step S93). The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be 15R probability variation big hit or 4R probability variation big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. When the big hit is decided, the special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is stopped. Is reset at the timing of ending or 50 variable display ends. If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S93), the CPU 56 uses a variation pattern type determination table for deviation for probability variation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. Select (step S97). Then, control goes to a step S98.

  If the probability variation flag is not set (N in Step S93), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Step S94). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S94), the CPU 56 uses a normal deviation variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Is selected (step S95). Then, control goes to a step S98.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S94), the CPU 56 uses the table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types as a table used for declining the variation time. A variation pattern type determination table is selected (step S96). Then, control goes to a step S98.

  In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more by executing the processing of steps S93 to S96, the deviation variation pattern type determination table for variation time reduction is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability variation state, a probability variation variation pattern type determination table is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S98 described later, and when the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S99. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be performed.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storages are different tables. A common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for variation.

  Even if the gaming state is a probable change state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), a change display of a shortened change is performed. It may not be possible. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S93, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. A determination table may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of steps S92, S83, S97, S95 or S96. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S98). In the case where the random number 2 (variation pattern type determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type for generating the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2). A value may be directly extracted from the random number counter for use, and the variation pattern type may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S98, the CPU 56 uses a jackpot variation pattern determination table and a loss variation pattern determination table as tables used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. One of them is selected (step S99). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S99. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S100). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S101). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S103). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S104).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S93 to S96 and S98 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a variation pattern type determination table for non-reach and a variation pattern type determination table for reach are prepared in advance, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit any effect control command (see FIG. 9) of display result 1 designation to display result 3 designation according to the determined type of jackpot or loss. Do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S105). If not set, the process proceeds to step S109. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, control for transmitting a display result 2 designation command is performed (steps S106 and S107). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “4R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S106 and S108). Whether or not it is “4R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S65 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can.

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N of step S105), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S109).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S110).

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state if it is set (step S132).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a big hit start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is a 15R probability variable jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the jackpot type is 4R probability variation jackpot, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 4R probability variation jackpot is determined based on data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer).

  In addition, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying that the jackpot has occurred, for example, in the effect display device 9) in the timer before opening the big prize opening (step S134). Note that the pre-winner pre-opening timer is a timer for measuring the time until the big winning opening is opened during the big hit game. Specifically, at the start of the big hit game, in step S134, the time required from the start of the variable display to the start of the first round (the variable display is stopped on the effect control microcomputer 100 side and the jackpot symbol is displayed). The time before the first round is started until the start of the first round is set as the pre-opening timer. For the first and subsequent rounds, the interval time between the rounds (apparatus at the time of performing the interval effect between the rounds on the effect control microcomputer 100 side) is set as the timer before opening the big prize opening.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the number of releases corresponding to the jackpot type in the number-of-release counter (step S135). For example, 15 times is set in the open count counter for 15R probability variation big hit, and 4 times is set for 4R probability variation big hit.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S137).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step S141). If it is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state, step 56 is performed. The process proceeds to S150. When the probability variation flag is set, that is, when the probability variation state is set, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S142), and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step S143). . If not 0, the process proceeds to step S150. If it becomes 0, the probability variation flag is reset (step S144), and the process proceeds to step S150. As a result, the state is changed from the certain change state to the normal state when triggered by a predetermined number of times (50 times). In step S150, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit, a big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted, and in the case of 4R probability variation big hit, a big hit end 2 designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability change state (step S167). Then, “50” is set in the probability variation counter (step S168), and the process proceeds to step S171.

  In step S171, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S36) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol changing process is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable symbol special display. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203). ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the special symbol stop symbol. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). .

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step) S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  In step S706, control related to the display of the fourth symbol is performed in a special display layer described later.

  After step S706, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 9 and 10) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 10 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618A).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620). The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been normally received.

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag ( Step S622). In this embodiment, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag and the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S679), the effect control CPU 101 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S680).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S682), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen (for example, a red display). Color background screen) (step S683).

  In steps S680 and S683, specifically, the background is displayed on the normal display layer described later.

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S685), the effect control CPU 101 controls to display the customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 after 30 seconds (step S687). . Specifically, a timer for measuring 30 seconds is set, and when the timer times out, a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed on the effect display device 9. If a variation pattern command or the like is received during measurement, the timer is reset and the measurement ends. After step S687, the number of reserved memories stored in each reserved memory number storage area is cleared (step S688).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command or executes a process (step S691). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to either the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): When the big hit is reached, after the variation time is over, the effect display device 9 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. For example, when a fanfare designation command designating the start of a big hit is received, a fanfare effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. For example, if a display command indicating that the special winning opening is open is received, the display control of the number of rounds is performed.

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. For example, when a display command after opening the big prize opening indicating that the big prize opening is after being opened (closed), an interval display is performed.

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. For example, when an ending designation command for designating the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If a variation pattern that designates a pseudo-ream is also used and the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101, in step S8002, obtains a chance eye symbol (as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream) ( For example, a combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted) is also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 28, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 A combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are arranged in the same odd number as the stop symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “4R probability variation big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses 3 symbols as stop symbols. Determines the combination of performance symbols arranged with the same even number of symbols.

  In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 executes a notice effect setting process for setting the notice effect (step S8003). Here, for example, whether or not the starting change is a big hit, if it is a big hit, which type of big hit, or a predetermined notice effect (for example, reliability for the big hit) Whether or not to perform step-up advancement that develops to a stage corresponding to the player, button effect that switches the effect screen by receiving an operation from the player to the operation member, etc.) is determined.

  After step S8003, the effect control CPU 101 performs a pseudo light guide plate effect setting process related to the setting of the pseudo light guide plate effect (step S8004A). The pseudo light guide plate effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the light guide plate effect is being performed by performing a display imitating the light guide plate effect using the light guide plate by the effect display device 9. Here, the light guide plate effect will be briefly described. The light guide plate effect is a gaming machine that includes a light guide plate (acrylic plate) provided on the front side (player side) of the effect display device, and a light emitting member at a position where light can enter the end surface of the light guide plate. It is a feasible effect, and by causing the light emitting member to emit light, incident light from the light emitting member that is incident from the end surface of the light guide plate is guided by the reflecting portion provided inside the light guide plate, and from the front surface. The information is displayed by emitting the light (see FIGS. 41A1 to 41A3 and 42C1 to 42C described later). That is, since the display content of the light guide plate is determined by a reflection portion provided in advance inside the light guide plate, when providing light guide plate effects of a plurality of effect patterns with different display contents, the effect pattern The number of light guide plates must be provided.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the pseudo light guide plate effect that displays the pseudo light guide plate image that looks similar to the light guide plate effect on the effect display device 9 is executed. Specifically, as the pseudo light guide plate effect in this embodiment, the execution timing is before the occurrence of reach and the display content (pattern) is a character, and the execution timing is after the occurrence of reach. There is provided a second pseudo light guide plate effect in which the display content (pattern) is a character such as “Intense heat”. Each pseudo light guide plate effect is configured so that the reliability for the big hit is different depending on the displayed color tone (for example, blue, red, rainbow) and the display mode (for example, enlarged display, blinking display). It will be described later.

  In step S8004, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect when the change pattern or notice effect is executed (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005). An effect that is executed during a change such as a change in the effect pattern according to the change pattern or a notice effect may be referred to as an “in-change effect”.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes, for example, data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol (display of the effect display device 9 in addition to the display mode of the effect symbol) (Including other aspects of the screen) Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the production time in the production mode is set in the process timer set value. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, displays the effect design in the form set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value, and displays the character image or background displayed on the display screen. Control to display. In addition, the flashing of the light emitter is controlled in a manner set in the lamp control execution data and the sound number data, and the sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled.

  The process table shown in FIG. 29 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to the contents of each variation pattern and notice effect. If it is decided to execute the notice effect in the process of step S8004 or the like, it is not decided to select the process table in which data corresponding to the notice effect is set and to execute the notice effect. In this case, a process table for which data corresponding to the notice effect is not set is selected.

  Also, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  After step S8005, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect device (effect display device 9, speaker 27, LED, and accessory) according to the contents of the process data 1 (step S8006).

  The effect display device 9 in this embodiment can display a plurality of images in different layers. FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing the concept of the layer structure in the effect display device 9 of this embodiment. In the explanatory diagram shown in FIG. 30, display contents and display priorities are associated with each layer (display layer). As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, as a layer, the display contents are displayed in a normal effect image (normal effect (display of the fourth symbol or small symbol, and the effect excluding the pseudo light guide plate effect) or background. Normal display layer, the display content is a pseudo light guide plate image (image displayed in the pseudo light guide plate effect), and the display content is the fourth and small symbols (reach effect). A special display layer is provided which is an effect design displayed at a smaller timing than usual at a predetermined timing. The display priority is as follows: special display layer> pseudo light guide plate display layer> normal display layer. That is, when the pseudo light guide plate effect is executed during execution of the normal effect, the pseudo light guide plate image is displayed with priority over the normal effect image, and the fourth symbol or the small symbol is displayed during execution of the pseudo light guide plate effect. When the display is executed, the fourth symbol or the small symbol is displayed with priority over the pseudo light guide plate image. The pseudo light guide plate effect display layer includes a base and 1 to 5 layers, and the display priority is 5 layers> 4 layers> 3 layers> 2 layers> 1 layer> base. Specific display contents in the pseudo light guide plate effect display layer will be described later.

  In step S8006, as control of the effect display device 9, specifically, control of displaying the effect symbol and the notice effect in the normal display layer and displaying a small symbol image in the special display layer is performed.

  After step S8006, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the pseudo light guide plate effect setting process. In the pseudo light guide plate effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first performs a first pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first pseudo light guide plate effect (step S2801). Specifically, the presence / absence of execution of the first pseudo light guide plate effect is determined using the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32 (A1) is an explanatory view showing a first pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery table. The first pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (A1) executes the first pseudo light guide plate effect according to the variation pattern (SP reach big hit, normal reach big hit, SP reach out, normal reach out, non reach reach out). In the example shown in FIG. 32 (A1), the ratio of assigned determination values is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the variation pattern is a SP reach big hit, it is determined that executing the first pseudo light guide plate effect at a rate of 90% does not execute the first pseudo light guide plate effect at a rate of 10%. . For example, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach big hit, it is determined that the first pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a rate of 70% and the first pseudo light guide plate effect is not executed at a rate of 30%. The

  Further, for example, when the variation pattern is out of SP reach, it is determined that the first pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a rate of 50% and the first pseudo light guide plate effect is not executed at a rate of 50%. Is done. Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is out of the normal reach, it is determined that the first pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a rate of 30% and the first pseudo light guide plate effect is not executed at a rate of 70%. The Further, for example, when the variation pattern is non-reach, it is determined that the first pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a rate of 10% and the first pseudo light guide plate effect is not executed at a rate of 90%. Is done.

  After step S2801, the CPU 101 for effect control determines whether or not to execute the first pseudo light guide plate effect (step S2802). If not, the process proceeds to step S2807. When it is determined to execute, the effect control CPU 101 performs a first color tone determination lottery for determining the color tone of the first pseudo light guide plate effect to be executed (step S2802). Specifically, the color tone of the first pseudo light guide plate effect is determined using the first color tone determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32 (B1) is an explanatory diagram showing a first color tone determination lottery table. The first color tone determination lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (B1) corresponds to the color tone of the first pseudo light guide plate effect according to the variation pattern (SP reach big hit, normal reach big hit, SP reach out, normal reach out, non-reach out). Although the determination value is assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 32 (B1), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the first color tone determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the variation pattern is a SP reach big hit, “blue” is determined at a rate of 10%, “red” is determined at a rate of 30%, and “rainbow” is determined at a rate of 60%. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach big hit, “blue” is determined at a rate of 20%, “red” is determined at a rate of 30%, and “rainbow” is determined at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the variation pattern is out of SP reach, “blue” is determined at a rate of 30% and “red” is determined at a rate of 70%. Further, for example, when the variation pattern is out of normal reach, “blue” is determined at a rate of 50%, and “red” is determined at a rate of 50%. For example, when the variation pattern is non-reach, “blue” is determined at a rate of 80%, and “red” is determined at a rate of 20%.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the reliability with respect to the jackpot indicated by the color tone of the first pseudo light guide plate effect is “rainbow”> “red”> “blue”. In this embodiment, only when the variable display result is a big hit, “rainbow” can be selected as the color tone of the first pseudo light guide plate effect, that is, the first color tone is “rainbow”. When the pseudo light guide plate effect is generated, it is informed that it will be a big hit. Note that “rainbow” may be selectable as the color tone of the first pseudo light guide plate effect even when the variable display result is out of sync.

  After step S2803, the effect control CPU 101 performs a first effect pattern determination lottery for determining the effect pattern in the first pseudo light guide plate effect to be executed (step S2804). Specifically, the effect pattern of the first pseudo light guide plate effect is determined using the first effect pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (C1).

  FIG. 32 (C1) is an explanatory diagram showing a first effect pattern determination lottery table. In the first effect pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (C1), a determination value corresponding to the effect pattern of the first pseudo light guide plate effect is assigned according to the color tone (blue, red, rainbow). In the example shown in (C1), in order to simplify the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a first effect pattern determination lottery random number, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the color tone is “blue”, PT1 is produced as a production pattern at a rate of 40%, PT2 is produced as a production pattern at a rate of 30%, and PT3 is produced as a production pattern at a rate of 20%. PT4 is determined for each pattern. For example, when the color tone is “red”, any one of PT1 to PT4 is determined as the effect pattern at a rate of 25%. Also, for example, when the color tone is “rainbow”, PT1 is an effect pattern at a rate of 10%, PT2 is an effect pattern at a rate of 20%, PT3 is an effect pattern at a rate of 30%, and a rate of 40%. Thus, PT4 is determined as the production pattern.

  Thereby, the reliability with respect to the big hit which the production | presentation pattern in a 1st pseudo | simulation light-guide plate effect is PT4> PT3> PT2> PT1.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the first pseudo light guide plate effect having a color tone of “rainbow” is generated, it is notified that a big hit will occur. In the first pseudo light guide plate effect, the effect pattern selection ratio may be equal, or a fixed effect pattern (for example, PT4) may be selected at all times.

  Thus, in this embodiment, PT1 to PT4 are provided as the effect patterns of the pseudo light guide plate effect. Here, the effect pattern of the pseudo light guide plate effect indicates a transition of the image data pattern reproduced in the pseudo light guide plate effect. The image data pattern is obtained by patterning image data in the pseudo light guide plate effect for each display mode. For example, as the image data patterns, data patterns A to D described later in FIGS. 33 to 36 are provided. In this embodiment, for these four types of image data patterns, pseudo light guide plate effect types (patterns to be displayed) and color combinations (blue characters, red characters, iridescent characters, blue characters, red characters) Image data for each character (rainbow character) is provided. Details of the image data will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32D, PT1 reproduces the image data of data pattern A as image data corresponding to frames 0 to 15, and data pattern C as image data corresponding to frames 16 to 80. It is an effect pattern which shows reproducing the image data. PT2 is an effect pattern indicating that image data of data pattern B is reproduced as image data corresponding to frames 0 to 15, and image data of data pattern C is reproduced as image data corresponding to frames 16 to 80. is there. PT3 is an effect pattern indicating that image data of data pattern A is reproduced as image data corresponding to frames 0 to 15 and image data of data pattern D is reproduced as image data corresponding to frames 16 to 80. is there. PT4 is an effect pattern indicating that image data of data pattern B is reproduced as image data corresponding to frames 0 to 15, and image data of data pattern D is reproduced as image data corresponding to frames 16 to 80. is there.

  Here, specific examples of the data patterns A to D will be described with reference to FIGS. In each data pattern shown in FIGS. 33 to 36, the display mode (opacity, enlargement ratio) of the image corresponding to the frame is shown for each layer. “Opacity” is a numerical value representing the degree to which an image superimposed on the next lower layer can be seen through. For example, if the value is “0”, it means that the display image of the corresponding layer is not visible and the image superimposed on the layer below is seen through, and if it is “100” , Only the display image of the corresponding layer can be seen, and the image superimposed on the next lower layer cannot be seen. The “magnification ratio” represents the size of an image to be displayed with the predetermined size of the original image being “100”. For example, if the value is “50”, it indicates that the image is displayed at half the size of the original image. If the value is “270”, the size of the original image is displayed. This indicates that an image is displayed with a size 2.7 times as large as that of the image.

  Note that “↓” in the data pattern indicates the same value as the value immediately above. For example, it is shown that the opacity of the base in the frames 5 to 15 of the data pattern A is “50”.

  In addition, “(UP)” in the data pattern indicates that the value is higher than the value of the previous frame. If “(UP)” is indicated in consecutive frames, the difference is equal. It shows that the value rises at. For example, the base enlargement ratios of the data pattern B in the frames 6 to 12 are respectively shown as values that increase by an equal difference between “110” in the frame 5 and “270” in the frame 13. That is, the difference between the enlargement rates of the base frames in the frames 6 to 12 of the data pattern B is “20”, the enlargement rate of the frame 6 is “130”, the enlargement rate of the frame 7 is “150”, and the frame 8 The enlargement ratio of the frame 9 is “170”, the enlargement ratio of the frame 9 is “190”, the enlargement ratio of the frame 10 is “210”, the enlargement ratio of the frame 11 is “230”, and the enlargement ratio of the frame 12 is “250” It is shown.

  In addition, “(DOWN)” in the data pattern indicates that the value is lower than the value of the previous frame. If “(DOWN)” is indicated in consecutive frames, the difference is equal. It shows that the value falls at. For example, the opacity of the base in the frame 6 to the frame 12 of the data pattern B is shown as a value that decreases by an equal difference between “100” of the frame 5 and “0” of the frame 13. That is, the difference in opacity between the frames 6 to 12 of the data pattern B is “12.5”, the opacity of the frame 6 is “87.5”, and the opacity of the frame 7 is “75”. ”, The opacity of frame 8 is“ 62.5 ”, the opacity of frame 9 is“ 50 ”, the opacity of frame 10 is“ 37.5 ”, the opacity of frame 11 is“ 25 ”, and the opacity of frame 12 is The transparency is shown to be “12.5”.

  Also, the image data in this embodiment is such that 30 frames of data per second are developed in the frame memory by the VDP 109 and displayed on the effect display device 9 during reproduction.

  Further, the pseudo light guide plate image displayed in the pseudo light guide plate effect in this embodiment has a lower resolution than the effect image of the normal effect. Specifically, the resolution of the effect image of the normal effect is 96 ppi (pixel per inch), while the resolution of the pseudo light guide plate image is 48 ppi. The resolution of the pseudo light guide plate image is a value (approximate value) that matches the value of the resolution of the image displayed on the light guide plate (that is, the resolution of a picture (including characters and characters) processed on the acrylic plate). Or the same value). If the gaming machine includes a light guide plate and can execute the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect, an image with a resolution matching the resolution of the image displayed on the mounted light guide plate is displayed. Can be displayed.

  In addition, although a common pattern (character, character) according to the pseudo light guide plate effect type is displayed on the base and the first to fifth layers, the size of the original image displayed in the pseudo light guide plate effect is displayed. The (magnification of 100) is different for each layer. Specifically, “size of image displayed in one layer <size of image displayed in two layers <size of image displayed in three layers <size of image displayed in four layers <display in five layers” "The size of the image to be". Therefore, even when the enlargement ratio is the same value in the same frame, the actually displayed image is different for each layer. For example, in the frame 59 of the data pattern D shown in FIG. 36, the enlargement ratio in the first layer to the fifth layer is “124”, which is the same value, but the size of the original image is different. The size is larger as the layer has a higher display priority (see FIG. 45).

  Further, in the frame where the display is performed on the base and the first layer, the pattern is displayed at a position hidden on the pattern displayed on the first layer on the base. That is, in the frame in which the display is performed on the base and the first layer, the display of the base is visible to the player only when the opacity of the first layer is low.

  As described above, in this embodiment, “blue”, “red”, and “rainbow” are provided as the colors of the pseudo light guide plate effect. When displaying a pseudo light guide plate image (character, character) in a plurality of layers, the saturation of the displayed pseudo light guide plate image is different for each layer. For example, when the set color tone is “blue”, the higher the display priority, the higher the saturation and the higher the vividness of the blue. When the display layer increases or decreases in the middle frame (for example, data patterns B and D), the color in the layer with the highest display priority among the layers used for display is always constant. Specifically, the saturation is blue A> blue B> blue C, and in the next frame in which blue A is displayed on the first layer and blue B is displayed on the base, two layers are displayed. When started, the color of the pseudo light guide plate image in the layer with the highest visibility is obtained by switching the display color of the second layer to blue A, the display of the first layer to blue B, and the base display to blue C. Is always constant.

  FIG. 33A is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of data pattern A. FIG. As described above, the data pattern A is a data pattern of image data corresponding to the frames 0 to 15. As shown in FIG. 33A, in the data pattern A, display of the base and one layer is started in the frame 5, and the opacity of the one layer is repeatedly increased and decreased in the frames 5 to 15. Thereby, when the image data of the data pattern A is used, it can appear as if the pseudo light guide plate image is blinkingly displayed. As shown in the figure, when the image data of the data pattern A is used, only the base and one layer display is performed.

  FIG. 33B is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the data pattern B. As described above, the data pattern B is a data pattern of image data corresponding to the frames 0 to 15. As shown in FIG. 33 (B), in data pattern B, base display starts at frame 0, and the base opacity and enlargement ratio at frames 0 to 5 increase. As a result, when the image data of the data pattern B is used, the display is started while being enlarged, and the display can be made to become darker. As described above, when the image data of the data pattern B is used, the pseudo light guide plate effect is started from a stronger impression than when the image data of the data pattern A is used. In addition, when the display of the first layer and the second layer is started in the frame 6, the pseudo light guide plate effect display is performed in the three layers.

  FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the data pattern C. As described above, the data pattern C is a data pattern of image data corresponding to the frames 16 to 80. As shown in FIG. 34, in the data pattern C, the opacity of one layer in the frames 24 to 35 and the frames 50 to 75 is repeatedly increased and decreased. Thereby, when the image data of the data pattern C is used, it can be seen as if the pseudo light guide plate image is blinkingly displayed. As shown in FIG. 34, in the data pattern C, the opacity of one layer in the frames 75 to 80 decreases and the enlargement ratio increases. Thereby, when the image data of the data pattern C is used, the pseudo light guide plate image can appear to fade out. As shown in the figure, when image data of the data pattern C is used, only the base and one layer display is performed.

  35 and 36 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the data pattern D. FIG. As described above, the data pattern D is a data pattern of image data corresponding to the frames 16-80. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, in the data pattern D, only the base and the first layer are displayed in the frames 16 to 29, the two-layer display is started in the frame 30, and the three layers are displayed in the frame 39. Display is started, display of four layers is started at frame 48, and display of five layers is started at frame 59. As a result, the display of the higher priority layers is started sequentially. In the data pattern D, the opacity of each layer increases and decreases in the frames 22 to 25, the frames 30 to 35, the frames 38 to 43, the frames 48 to 53, and the frames 60 to 68. It is repeating. Thereby, when the image data of the data pattern D is used, it can appear as if the pseudo light guide plate image is blinkingly displayed. As shown in FIG. 36, in the data pattern D, in the frames 75 to 80, the opacity of the first to fifth layers decreases and the enlargement ratio increases. Thereby, when the image data of the data pattern D is used, the pseudo light guide plate image can appear to fade out.

  After step S2804, the effect control CPU 101 sets the pseudo light guide plate effect by storing the lottery results of the first color tone determination lottery and the first effect pattern determination lottery (step S2805), and the first pseudo light guide plate effect. Is set (step S2806), and the process proceeds to step S2807.

  In step S2807, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is reach variation (step S2807). If it is not reach variation (that is, non-reach deviation), the pseudo light guide plate effect setting process is terminated. . In the case of reach variation, a second pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery for determining whether or not to execute the second pseudo light guide plate effect is performed (step S2808). Specifically, whether or not to execute the second pseudo light guide plate effect is determined using the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (A2).

  FIG. 32 (A2) is an explanatory view showing a second pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery table. The second pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (A2) corresponds to whether or not the second pseudo light guide plate effect is executed according to the variation pattern (SP reach big hit, normal reach big hit, SP reach out, normal reach out). In the example shown in FIG. 32 (A2), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the variation pattern is a SP reach big hit, it is determined that the second pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a rate of 95% and the second pseudo light guide plate effect is not executed at a rate of 5%. . Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach big hit, it is determined that the second pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a rate of 75% and the second pseudo light guide plate effect is not executed at a rate of 25%. The

  Further, for example, when the variation pattern is out of SP reach, it is determined that the first pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a rate of 45% and the second pseudo light guide plate effect is not executed at a rate of 55%. Is done. Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, it is determined that the second pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a rate of 25% and the second pseudo light guide plate effect is not executed at a rate of 75%. The

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32A1 and 32A2, the second pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a higher rate than the first pseudo light guide plate effect in the case of a big hit. , The first pseudo light guide plate effect is executed at a higher rate than the second pseudo light guide plate effect when they are out of place. Thereby, the reliability with respect to the occurrence of the big hit is first pseudo light guide plate effect <second pseudo light guide plate effect. The first pseudo light guide plate effect may have a higher reliability for the big hit than the second pseudo light guide plate effect, or the first pseudo light guide plate effect and the second pseudo light guide plate effect may be reliable for the big hit. The structure which does not vary degree may be sufficient.

  After step S2808, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the second pseudo light guide plate effect (step S2809), and if not, ends the pseudo light guide plate effect setting process. To do. When it is determined to execute, the second color tone determination lottery for determining the color tone of the second pseudo light guide plate effect to be executed is performed (step S2810). Specifically, the color tone of the second pseudo light guide plate effect is determined using the second color tone determination lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (B2).

  FIG. 32 (B2) is an explanatory diagram showing a second color tone determination lottery table. In the second color tone determination lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (B2), a determination value corresponding to the color tone of the second pseudo light guide plate effect is assigned according to the variation pattern (SP reach big hit, normal reach big hit, SP reach out, normal reach out) However, in the example shown in FIG. 32 (B2), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the second color tone determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the variation pattern is a SP reach big hit, “blue” is determined at a rate of 5%, “red” is determined at a rate of 30%, and “rainbow” is determined at a rate of 65%. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach big hit, “blue” is determined at a rate of 15%, “red” is determined at a rate of 30%, and “rainbow” is determined at a rate of 55%.

  For example, when the variation pattern is out of SP reach, “blue” is determined at a rate of 35% and “red” is determined at a rate of 65%. For example, when the variation pattern is out of normal reach, “blue” is determined at a rate of 55%, and “red” is determined at a rate of 45%.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the reliability with respect to the big hit indicated by the color tone of the second pseudo light guide plate effect is “rainbow”> “red”> “blue”. Further, in this embodiment, only when the variable display result is a big hit, the “rainbow” can be selected as the color tone of the second pseudo light guide plate effect, that is, the second color tone is “rainbow”. When the pseudo light guide plate effect is generated, it is informed that it will be a big hit. Note that “rainbow” may be selected as the color tone of the second pseudo light guide plate effect even when the variable display result is out of place.

  After step S2810, the effect control CPU 101 performs a second effect pattern determination lottery for determining the effect pattern in the second pseudo light guide plate effect to be executed (step S2811). Specifically, the effect pattern of the second pseudo light guide plate effect is determined using the second effect pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 32 (C2) is an explanatory diagram showing a second effect pattern determination lottery table. In the second effect pattern determination lottery table shown in FIG. 32 (C2), determination values corresponding to the effect pattern of the second pseudo light guide plate effect are assigned according to the color tone (blue, red, rainbow). In the example shown in (C2), in order to simplify the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the second effect pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the color tone is “blue”, PT1 is produced as a production pattern at a rate of 45%, PT2 is produced as a production pattern at a rate of 35%, and PT3 is produced as a production pattern at a rate of 15%. PT4 is determined for each pattern. For example, when the color tone is “red”, PT1 or PT2 is determined as an effect pattern at a rate of 20%, and PT3 or PT4 is determined as an effect pattern at a rate of 30%. Also, for example, when the color tone is “rainbow”, PT1 is an effect pattern at a rate of 5%, PT2 is an effect pattern at a rate of 15%, PT3 is an effect pattern at a rate of 35%, and a rate of 45%. Thus, PT4 is determined as the production pattern.

  Thereby, the reliability with respect to the big hit which the production | presentation pattern in a 2nd pseudo | simulation light guide plate effect | present is PT4> PT3> PT2> PT1. In this embodiment, the effect pattern in the first pseudo light guide plate effect and the effect pattern in the second pseudo light guide plate effect are common (PT1 to PT4), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as having PT1-PT4 as an effect pattern in the 1st pseudo light guide plate effect, and having PT5-PT12 as an effect pattern in the 2nd pseudo light guide plate effect.

  In this embodiment, as described above, when the second pseudo light guide plate effect having a color tone of “rainbow” is generated, it is notified that a big hit will occur. In the second pseudo light guide plate effect, the effect pattern selection ratio may be equal, or a fixed effect pattern (for example, PT4) may be selected at all times.

  After step S2811, the effect control CPU 101 sets the pseudo light guide plate effect by storing the lottery results of the second color tone determination lottery and the second effect pattern determination lottery (step S2812), and the second pseudo light guide plate effect. Is set (step S2813), and the pseudo light guide plate effect setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the first effect flag is set (step S3701), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S3706. If set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1 (step S3702). In this embodiment, specifically, one second after the start of the fluctuation is set as the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1, but any timing is the first pseudo light guide timing before the reach occurs. It is good also as light guide plate production execution timing T1. For example, the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1 may be different for each variation pattern, or may be the same. Further, the first pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed at a plurality of timings before reach, and the reliability may be different depending on the execution timing of the first pseudo light guide plate effect. If it is not the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1, the process proceeds to step S3706.

  At the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1, the effect control CPU 101 starts mask display for masking the display content (normal effect image) displayed on the normal display layer (step S3703). Thereby, the visibility of a normal effect image is reduced. In this embodiment, a mask that reduces the visibility of the normal effect image by 70% is applied, but this is not a limitation, and the mask is reduced by 100% (that is, blacked out so that it cannot be viewed). It may be a thing. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the first pseudo light guide plate effect based on the set effect pattern and color tone (step S3704). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the image data table shown in FIG. 38, selects image data for each frame, and causes the VDP 109 to display an image using the image data.

  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing an image data table. The image data table shown in FIG. 38 is for each pseudo light guide plate effect type (first pseudo light guide plate effect, first pseudo light guide plate effect), color tone (blue, red, rainbow), and effect pattern (PT1 to PT4). The selected image data is associated. In this embodiment, 24 types of image data are provided. Specifically, gd11 to gd16 are the image data of the data pattern A, gd21 to gd26 are the image data of the data pattern B, gd31 to gd36 are the image data of the data pattern C, and the image of the data pattern D As data, gd41 to gd46 are provided. In addition, parentheses in “image data for each frame” in the drawing indicate which data pattern the image data is. For example, gd11 (A) indicates image data of the data pattern A, and gd42 (D) indicates image data of the data pattern D.

  gd11, 21, 31, and 41 are image data when the pseudo light guide plate effect type is the first pseudo light guide plate effect (that is, the display content is a character) and the color tone is blue. gd12, 22, 32, and 42 are image data when the pseudo light guide plate effect type is the first pseudo light guide plate effect (that is, the display content is a character) and the color tone is red. gd13, 23, 33, and 43 are image data when the pseudo light guide plate effect type is the first pseudo light guide plate effect (that is, the display content is a character) and the color tone is rainbow.

  gd14, 24, 34, and 44 are image data when the pseudo light guide plate effect type is the second pseudo light guide plate effect (that is, the display content is a character such as “hot heat”) and the color tone is blue. . gd15, 25, 35, and 45 are image data when the pseudo light guide plate effect type is the second pseudo light guide plate effect (that is, the display content is a character such as “hot heat”) and the color tone is red. . gd16, 26, 36, and 46 are image data when the pseudo light guide plate effect type is the second pseudo light guide plate effect (that is, the display content is a character such as “hot heat”) and the color tone is rainbow. .

  After step S3704, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first effect flag (step S3705), and proceeds to step S3706.

  In step S3706, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the second effect flag is set (step S3706). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S8101. If set, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2 (step S3707). In this embodiment, specifically, the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2 is one second after the occurrence of reach, but any timing is acceptable as long as it is later than the occurrence of reach. It may be the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2. For example, the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2 may be different for each variation pattern, or may be the same. Further, the second pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed at a plurality of timings after the reach, and the reliability may be different depending on the execution timing of the second pseudo light guide plate effect. If it is not the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2, the process proceeds to step S8101.

  If it is the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2, the effect control CPU 101 starts mask display for masking the display content (normal effect) displayed on the normal display layer (step S3708). Thereby, the visibility of a normal effect is reduced. After that, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the second pseudo light guide plate effect based on the set effect pattern and color tone (step S3709). Specifically, the effect control CPU 101 uses the image data table shown in FIG. 38 to select image data to be displayed as the second pseudo light guide plate effect, and causes the VDP 109 to display an image using the image data.

  After step S3709, the effect control CPU 101 resets the second effect flag (step S3710), and proceeds to step S8101.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  In step S8105, as control of the effect display device 9, specifically, control of displaying an effect symbol or a notice effect in the normal display layer, or displaying a small symbol in the special display layer is performed.

  Then, if the change time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  By executing steps S3701 to S3710, in this embodiment, the pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed at a plurality of timings. For example, FIG. 39 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of the pseudo light guide plate effect in this embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the first pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed from the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1 before the reach timing Tr when the reach occurs, and the reach timing Tr The second pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed from the later second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2. Thereby, the pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed before and after reach, and the interest can be improved.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, first, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S861). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S867. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when a jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S866. When the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag is reset in step S868. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set in step S861 is a stage in which the fanfare effect has not yet been executed although the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S862 Without moving to step S867.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the stored stop symbol (disconnected symbol or jackpot symbol) (step S862). The production control CPU 101 may perform control to stop and display the production symbol in response to the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command from the game control microcomputer 560.

  When the big hit symbol is displayed in step S862 (Y in step S863), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S866) and the fanfare flag (big hit start 1 designation command reception flag or big hit start 2). It is confirmed whether or not the (specified command reception flag) has been set (step S867). When the fanfare flag is set (Y in step S867), the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S868) and selects process data corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S869). Then, the process timer is started (step S870).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S871).

  When the big hit symbol is not displayed in step S863 (that is, when the off symbol is displayed: N in step S863), the presentation control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S864). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, immediately after confirming the variation pattern command reception flag, the variation pattern command The reception flag may be reset).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S865).

  Next, a specific display example of the pseudo light guide plate effect will be described with reference to FIGS. First, a display example in the pseudo light guide plate effect will be described using FIGS. 41 and 42 in comparison with a display example of the light guide plate effect. 41 and 42 are explanatory diagrams showing a display example in the light guide plate effect and a display example in the pseudo light guide plate effect. In the explanatory view shown in FIG. 41, display examples of light guide plate effects are shown in FIGS. 41 (A1) to (A3), and display examples of pseudo light guide plate effects are shown in FIGS. 41 (B1) to (B3). . In the explanatory view shown in FIG. 42, display examples of light guide plate effects are shown in FIGS. 42 (C1) to (C3), and display examples of pseudo light guide plate effects are shown in FIGS. 42 (D1) to (D3). ing.

  First, a specific example of the light guide plate effect will be described. 41 (A1) to (A3) and the game machines shown in FIGS. 42 (C1) to (C3) include an effect display device 9, a light guide plate X disposed on the player side of the effect display device 9, and the guide. A light emitting member (not shown) is provided at a position where light can enter the end face of the optical plate X. The light guide plate X is provided with a reflecting portion that displays display information by guiding incident light from a light emitting member that has entered the light guide plate X from an end surface thereof and emitting the light from the front surface. In this gaming machine, by causing the light emitting member to emit light, incident light from the light emitting member that is incident on the inside from the end surface of the light guide plate X is guided by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface, thereby displaying the display information. Light plate effects can be executed.

  For example, FIGS. 41A1 to 41A3 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of a light guide plate effect that displays a character as display information. The light guide plate X shown here is provided with a reflecting portion so that a character can be displayed in the light guide plate effect. As shown in FIG. 41 (A1), the effect display device 9 displays a variation of the effect symbol. At this time, the effect symbol is displayed as a small symbol (an effect symbol displayed in a size smaller than normal), but is not limited to this, and an effect symbol of a normal size is displayed. It may be. Then, when it is time to perform the light guide plate effect, as shown in FIG. 41 (A2), by masking the display image of the effect display device 9, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the display content in the light guide plate effect. To do. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (A3), the light emitting member emits light, and the character is displayed on the light guide plate X as display information. At this time, since the light guide plate X is provided on the player side with respect to the effect display device 9, the visibility of the small symbols is reduced by the display of the light guide plate X.

  Further, for example, FIGS. 42C1 to 42C3 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of a light guide plate effect that displays characters such as “extreme heat” as display information. The light guide plate X shown here is provided with a reflective portion so that characters such as “extreme heat” can be displayed in the light guide plate effect. As shown in FIG. 42 (C1), the effect display device 9 displays the variation of the effect symbol. At this time, the effect design is displayed as a small design, but is not limited to this, and an effect design of a normal size may be displayed. When it is time to perform the light guide plate effect, as shown in FIG. 42 (C2), by masking the display image of the effect display device 9, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the display content in the light guide plate effect. To do. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42 (C3), the light emitting member emits light, and characters such as “extreme heat” are displayed on the light guide plate X. At this time, since the light guide plate X is provided on the player side with respect to the effect display device 9, the visibility of the small symbols is reduced by the display of the light guide plate X.

  Next, a specific example of the pseudo light guide plate effect will be described. For example, FIGS. 41B1 to 41B3 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of the first pseudo light guide plate effect in which a character is displayed as a pseudo light guide plate image. As shown in FIG. 41 (B1), the effect display device 9 displays the variation of the effect symbol. At this time, the effect symbol is displayed as a small symbol. Then, when the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1 is reached, as shown in FIG. 41 (B2), the display image of the normal display layer in the effect display device 9 is masked to provide the first pseudo light guide plate effect. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed content. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (B3), the character is displayed on the effect display device 9 as a pseudo light guide plate image. At this time, the special display layer on which the small symbols are displayed has higher display priority than the pseudo light guide plate effect display layer on which the pseudo light guide plate image is displayed (see FIG. 30), and therefore has priority over the pseudo light guide plate image. Thus, a small symbol is displayed. Therefore, a pseudo light guide plate effect similar to the light guide plate effect can be executed without disturbing the visual recognition of the small symbols. Further, by displaying an image having a resolution lower than that of the normal effect image in the effect display device 9 as a pseudo light guide plate image, it is possible to perform display with higher similarity to the light guide plate effect.

  Further, for example, FIGS. 42D1 to 42D3 are explanatory diagrams illustrating a specific example of the second pseudo light guide plate effect in which characters such as “extreme heat” are displayed as the display information pseudo light guide plate image. As shown in FIG. 42 (D1), the effect display device 9 displays a variation of the effect symbol. At this time, the effect symbol is displayed as a small symbol. Then, when the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2 is reached, as shown in FIG. 42 (D2), the display image of the normal display layer in the effect display device 9 is masked to provide the second pseudo light guide plate effect. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed content. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 42 (D3), characters such as “extreme heat” are displayed on the effect display device 9 as a pseudo light guide plate image. At this time, the special display layer on which the small symbols are displayed has higher display priority than the pseudo light guide plate effect display layer on which the pseudo light guide plate image is displayed (see FIG. 30), and therefore has priority over the pseudo light guide plate image. Thus, a small symbol is displayed. Therefore, a pseudo light guide plate effect similar to the light guide plate effect can be executed without disturbing the visual recognition of the small symbols. Further, by displaying an image having a resolution lower than that of the normal effect image in the effect display device 9 as a pseudo light guide plate image, it is possible to perform display with higher similarity to the light guide plate effect.

  In this way, when comparing the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect, the pseudo light guide plate effect is different from the light guide plate effect in that it displays a display similar to the light guide plate effect without reducing the visibility of small symbols. Is possible. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a light guide plate in the pseudo light guide plate effect, it is possible to prevent an increase in the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  43 to 45 are explanatory diagrams showing specific display examples in the pseudo light guide plate effect. The explanatory diagram shown in FIG. 43 shows a display example of the second pseudo light guide plate effect when PT1 (the effect pattern that transitions to the image data of the data pattern C after the image data of the data pattern A) is selected as the effect pattern. ing. As shown in FIG. 43 (1), the execution of the second pseudo light guide plate effect is started when the effect display device 9 is performing the variable display of the effect symbol, and in the frame 5, as shown in FIG. 43 (2). The letters “Intense heat” are displayed in one layer. At this time, although the characters “Intense heat” are also displayed on the base, it is difficult to visually recognize the display with a single layer. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 43 (3) to 43 (6), the frames 6 to 15, the frames 24 to 35, and the frames 50 to 75 appear to blink as the opacity increases and decreases. Will display the word “Intense Heat”. Then, in the frames 76 to 80, as shown in FIGS. 43 (7) and 43 (8), the display is faded out as the opacity decreases and the enlargement ratio increases. Also in this case, it is possible to perform display similar to the light guide plate effect while ensuring the visibility of small symbols.

  The explanatory diagram shown in FIG. 44 shows a display example of the second pseudo light guide plate effect when PT2 (the effect pattern that transitions to the image data of the data pattern C after the image data of the data pattern B) is selected as the effect pattern. ing. As shown in FIG. 44 (1), the execution of the second pseudo light guide plate effect is started when the effect display device 9 is performing the variable display of the effect symbol. 44 (frame 6 to frame 13) as shown in FIG. 44 (3), while increasing the opacity and the enlargement ratio from the state shown in FIG. Display of one layer and two layers is performed. Then, in the frames 24 to 35 and the frames 50 to 75, as shown in FIGS. 44 (4) to 44 (8), “hot heat” appears as if the opacity is flashing as the opacity increases and decreases. Characters are displayed. In the frames 76 to 80, as shown in FIGS. 44 (9) and 44 (10), the display is faded out as the magnifying rate increases while the opacity decreases. Also in this case, it is possible to perform display similar to the light guide plate effect while ensuring the visibility of small symbols.

  The explanatory diagram shown in FIG. 45 shows a display example of the second pseudo light guide plate effect when the image data of the data pattern D is used. In the frames 16 to 29, as shown in FIG. 45 (1), the characters “Intense heat” are displayed in one layer. At this time, although the characters “Intense heat” are also displayed on the base, it is difficult to visually recognize the display with a single layer. In the frame 30, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed in two layers as shown in FIG. 45 (2), and in the frame 39, the characters “Intense heat” are displayed in three layers as shown in FIG. 45 (3). Is displayed on the frame 48 as shown in FIG. 45 (4), and the word “Intense heat” is displayed on the fifth layer in the frame 59 as shown in FIG. 45 (5). Is displayed. In this manner, a pseudo light guide plate effect similar to display by a plurality of light guide plates can be executed. Also in this case, it is possible to perform display similar to the light guide plate effect while ensuring the visibility of small symbols.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game machine is capable of playing a game, and is a specific image effect executing means (simply referred to as “effect executing means”) capable of executing effects related to the game. (In this example, the step of executing step S705 in the effect control microcomputer 100) is provided, and the specific image effect execution means includes a predetermined image (in this example, a normal effect image such as an effect symbol and a background). ) In a state where the visibility of the predetermined image is reduced (in this example, steps S3703 and S3708 have been executed) during execution of the predetermined effect (in this example, a normal effect such as a changing effect). The specific image (in this example, the pseudo light guide plate image) is placed on the front side of the predetermined image (in this example, the pseudo guide that is a layer having a higher display priority than the normal display layer displaying the normal effect image). It is possible to execute a specific image effect (in this example, a pseudo light guide plate effect) that is displayed superimposed on the board effect display layer (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 can execute steps S3704 and S3709. It was decided that. Thereby, the kind of production increases and an interest can be improved.

  Further, if various patterns are displayed by light guide plate effects, it is necessary to provide as many light guide plates as the number of display patterns, which increases the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine. Therefore, by executing the pseudo light guide plate effect by the effect display device 9 as in this embodiment, it is possible to provide the same effect as the effect by the light guide plate while preventing an increase in manufacturing cost.

  It should be noted that the “state in which the visibility of the predetermined image is reduced” is a state in which the predetermined image can be visually recognized as in this embodiment (for example, FIG. 41 (B2), (B3)) or a state in which the predetermined image cannot be visually recognized. In this embodiment, the visibility of the predetermined image is reduced by applying a mask. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the visibility of the predetermined image may be reduced by switching the predetermined image itself to one with low visibility (for example, an image with low brightness).

  In this embodiment, a predetermined image (normal effect image) is displayed on a layer with a low display priority, and a specific image (pseudo light guide plate image) is displayed on a layer with a low display priority. Although it is realized that “the image is displayed superimposed on the front side of the predetermined image”, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one image provided in advance is displayed so that a specific image (for example, a pseudo light guide plate image) is superimposed on the front side of a predetermined image (for example, a normal effect image) (that is, the specific image is actually specified). Instead of displaying the image and the predetermined image in an overlapping manner, the specific image is displayed as if it is superimposed on the front side of the predetermined image. It is good also as implement | achieving "it superimposes and displays on the front side."

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as image data corresponding to the data patterns A to D, for each pseudo light guide plate effect type (first pseudo light guide plate effect, second pseudo light guide plate effect) and color tone (blue, red, rainbow) Although different gd11 to gd16, gd21 to gd26, gd31 to gd36, and gd41 to gd46 are provided and the pseudo light guide plate effect is executed using any one of the image data, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo light guide plate effect is executed using the data patterns A to D irrespective of the pseudo light guide plate effect type (first pseudo light guide plate effect, second pseudo light guide plate effect) and color tone (blue, red, rainbow). It is good as well. Specifically, it is selected which of the data patterns A to D the image corresponding to which data pattern is displayed, and according to the pseudo light guide plate effect type and color tone based on the opacity and magnification of the selected data pattern The pseudo light guide plate effect may be executed by repeating the process of synthesizing and displaying the pattern (blue, red, or rainbow character or character) for each frame. In this case, as image data corresponding to the pattern according to the pseudo light guide plate effect type and color tone, six types of data (blue character, red character, rainbow character, blue character) that are combinations of the pattern and color tone are included. , Red letters and rainbow-colored letters) are sufficient, so that the storage capacity can be reduced as compared with this embodiment.

  In this embodiment, the description has been given using the gaming machine in which the light guide plate is not provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate and capable of executing a light guide plate effect, a pseudo light guide plate effect may be executed. In that case, the same display may be performed in the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect. For example, six light guide plates whose display contents are all “super heat” and whose display contents are different from each other are arranged on the front side (player side) as the display contents are larger. The first light guide plate A is the base, the second light guide plate B from the back side is one layer, the third light guide plate C is the second light guide plate C from the back side, and the third light guide plate D is from the front side. Display control (light emission of the light emitting member provided on each end face) with 3 layers, 4 layers of the second light guide plate E from the front side, and 5 layers of the first light guide plate F. For example, a light guide plate effect that performs display similar to the pseudo light guide plate effect shown in this embodiment can be executed. At this time, by sequentially performing display control of the light guide plate from the back side to the front side, it is possible to make it appear as if the characters that are the display contents are enlarged, and conversely the display of the light guide plate from the front side to the back side By sequentially performing the control, it is possible to make it appear as if the characters that are the display contents are reduced. In addition, if the light guide plate arranged on the front side is configured so that the saturation of the light emission color of the light emitting member provided on the end surface is increased, the similarity between the display of the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect is further increased. Can be increased. Moreover, the display similar to the display at the time of adjusting the opacity in pseudo light guide plate effect can be performed by adjusting the brightness of the light by the light emitting member. Further, if the light guide plate disposed on the front side is configured so that the saturation of the light emission color of the light emitting member provided on the end surface is increased, the similarity between the display of the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect is further increased. be able to.

  As the execution timing of the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect, the effects may be executed in parallel or may be executed independently. Moreover, it is good also as performing the staged effect which performs display control of a light-guide plate after displaying a pseudo light-guide plate image, and the staged effect which displayed the pseudo-light-guide plate image after performing display control of a light-guide plate It is good also as performing. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  Alternatively, the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect may be combined (that is, an effect combining the display control of the light guide plate and the display of the pseudo light guide plate image may be executed). For example, three light guide plates whose display contents are all “super heat” and whose display contents are different from each other are arranged on the front side (player side) as the display contents are larger. The three light guide plates and the three display layers in the effect display device 9 may be used to produce an effect that looks like a light guide plate effect using six light guide plates. For example, one layer of display layer for pseudo light guide plate effect, two layers of display layer for pseudo light guide plate effect, three layers of display layer for pseudo light guide plate effect, first light guide plate on the back side, second guide on the back side By performing display control in the order of the light plate and the light guide plate on the frontmost side, it is possible to execute an effect that interlocks so that the display content is enlarged. Conversely, the light guide plate on the first front side, the light guide plate on the second front side, the light guide plate on the backmost side, the three display layers for the pseudo light guide plate effect, the two layers of the display layer for the pseudo light guide plate effect, the pseudo By performing display control in the order of one layer of the light guide plate effect display layer, it is also possible to execute an effect linked with the display content to be reduced.

  In addition, a light guide plate effect, a pseudo light guide plate effect, a stepwise first effect of performing display control of the light guide plate after displaying the pseudo light guide plate image, and a pseudo light guide plate image after performing display control of the light guide plate The degree of reliability may be different between the displayed stepwise second effect and the third effect that simultaneously executes display control of the light guide plate and display of the pseudo light guide plate image. For example, the reliability may be a pseudo light guide plate effect <light guide plate effect <first effect <second effect <third effect, or vice versa.

  In addition, if the gaming machine can execute both the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect, the case of executing only the light guide plate effect, the case of executing only the pseudo light guide plate effect, and the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect. The reliability for the big hit, the reliability for the big win advantageous for the player, and the reliability for being controlled in a gaming state advantageous for the player are different from the case where the game is executed in parallel. Also good. For example, when the gaming state is controlled to the effect mode that does not notify whether or not it is a high probability state, if it is a high probability state, the light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect are most easily executed in parallel. Next, only the light guide plate effect may be easily executed, and only the pseudo light guide plate effect may be difficult to execute. In the low-probability state, only the pseudo light guide plate effect is most easily executed, and then only the light guide plate effect is easily executed. The light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect may be difficult to execute in parallel. .

  Moreover, although description is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment, it is good also as being able to perform the pseudo light guide plate suggestion effect which suggests execution of a pseudo light guide plate effect. Thereby, it is possible to give a player a sense of expectation for the execution of the pseudo light guide plate effect, and to improve the interest. Moreover, if it is a game machine which can perform a light guide plate effect, it is good also as being able to perform the light guide plate suggestion effect which suggests execution of a light guide plate effect. Thereby, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the light guide plate effect will be executed, and the entertainment can be improved. In addition, if the gaming machine is capable of executing a pseudo light guide plate effect and a light guide plate effect, it may be possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests execution of any one of the pseudo light guide plate effect and the light guide plate effect. . Thereby, the player can be given a sense of expectation that one of the effects will be executed, and the interest can be improved.

  Further, in a gaming machine including a light guide plate and an effect display device, the positional relationship between the light guide plate and the effect display device is provided at the overlapping position (the light guide plate is on the near side and the effect display device is on the back side (z-axis direction)). It is not limited to what is being done. For example, the light guide plate may be provided on the left or right side (x-axis direction) of the effect display device, or may be provided on the upper side or the lower side (y-axis direction). . For example, the effect display device A, the light guide plate provided on the front side of the effect display device, and the effect display provided on the right side of the effect display device A and the light guide plate (position not overlapping with the effect display device A and the light guide plate) The apparatus B includes a light guide plate effect using the light guide plate and a pseudo light guide plate effect using the effect display device B, and the display content in the light guide plate effect and the display content in the pseudo light guide plate effect. The light guide plate effect and the pseudo light guide plate effect may be executable so that and become a common picture or pattern, or a series of pictures or patterns. In that case, during normal times (when the light guide plate effect is not executed), the symbols displayed on the effect display device A (including effect symbols, small symbols, and 4th symbol), abnormality notification, and game ball launch are instructed. An image such as an instruction notification image to be displayed may be moved to the special display layer of the effect display device B and displayed during execution of the light guide plate effect. Thereby, a light guide plate effect and a pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed without hindering visual recognition of images such as symbols, abnormality notifications, and instruction notification images.

  In addition, as described above, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of specific image effects having different rendering modes (in this example, a plurality of types of pseudo light guide plate effects having different patterns, execution timings, color tones, or performance patterns) ) Can be executed. Thereby, the production effect of specific image production can be improved. In addition, as the effect mode, a plurality of types of pseudo light guide plate effects having different display positions and display image sizes may be executable.

  Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display identification information (in this example, the fourth symbol, the small symbol) on the front side of the specific image. Thereby, the production effect can be improved while ensuring the visibility of the identification information. The “identification information” does not have to correspond to a special symbol. When a symbol corresponding to a normal symbol can be displayed, the symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed on the front side of the pseudo light guide plate image. It is good also as being able to display in. In addition, an operation instruction display that prompts the player to operate an operation member such as the push button 120 may be displayed on the front side of the specific image. Thereby, the pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed without hindering the operation instruction display.

  In this embodiment, the specific image effect executing means puts the predetermined image in a masked state so as to reduce the visibility of the predetermined image (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the step S3703 and S3708 can be executed). Thereby, the production effect of specific image production can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific image effect executing means can execute a specific image effect in which the opacity of the specific image is switched a plurality of times (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 has a data pattern. By using the image data of A, it is possible to execute a pseudo light guide plate effect in which the opacity is switched a plurality of times in one layer of the frames 5 to 15. Further, by using the image data of the data pattern C, the frames 24 to 35 are used. The pseudo light guide plate effect in which the opacity is switched a plurality of times in one layer of the frame 50 to the frame 75 can be executed, and by using the image data of the data pattern D, one layer of the frame 22 to the frame 25, 1st and 2nd layer of frame 29 to frame 35, 1st to 3rd of frame 38 to frame 43 The frame 1 four layers of 48 to frame 53, opacity in one layer 5 layer frame 60 frame 68 is capable of executing multiple switches pseudo light guide plate effect) that the the. Thereby, the production effect of specific image production can be improved.

  The specific value of opacity is not limited to the above. For example, it is possible to intermittently switch ON / OFF of the substantial display and blink the specific image by repeating the switching to a predetermined value after setting the opacity value to “0” a plurality of times. The specific image may be blinked by intermittently switching the presence / absence of the display of the specific image.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific image effect execution means can execute a specific image effect that displays a specific image having a resolution lower than that of the predetermined image (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 has a resolution of It is possible to display the effect image of the normal effect of 96 ppi and the effect image of the pseudo light guide plate effect having the resolution of 48 ppi (see FIG. 41 (B3)). Thereby, since it can be displayed as if it is displayed by the light guide plate, it is possible to provide the same effect as the effect by the light guide plate, and to improve the effect of the specific image effect.

  In this embodiment, the specific image effect executing means can execute a specific image effect in which a plurality of superimposed images are displayed as the specific image (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 uses the data pattern A By using the image data of .about.D, it is possible to execute a pseudo light guide plate effect that displays a pseudo light guide plate image in a plurality of layers (base and 1 layer to 5 layers) having different display priorities). Thereby, it can be made to look like the display by a some light-guide plate, and the production effect of a specific image effect can be improved.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific image effect executing means can execute the specific image effect at a plurality of timings (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 includes the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1 and The pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed at the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2). Thereby, the production effect of specific image production can be improved.

  The execution timing of the pseudo light guide plate effect is not limited to the first pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T1 before reach and the second pseudo light guide plate effect execution timing T2 after reach. For example, the pseudo light guide plate effect may be executable during the big hit. For example, a pseudo light guide plate effect as an effect indicating that the type of big hit that shifts to a high probability state, an effect indicating that the round continues, or an effect indicating that a reserved memory that is a big hit is stored It may be performed during a big hit. Moreover, if it is a type of game machine which shifts to a certain change state based on the game ball having passed through the specific area. As an effect indicating that the game ball has passed through the specific area, a pseudo light guide plate effect may be executed during a big hit. Even in the case where the pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed during the big hit, the reliability may be different depending on the color tone or effect pattern as in this embodiment.

  Further, in this embodiment, the pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed with any variation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game state is controlled to a specific game state (for example, high base state, low base state, high probability state, low probability state), or whether a specific performance mode (for example, high probability state) If it is controlled in a latent mode or a mission mode that makes it difficult for a person to recognize, the pseudo light guide plate effect may be executable. Further, a pseudo light guide plate effect may be executable as an effect for a variation that has not yet been started (so-called pre-reading effect).

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific image effect executing means can execute the specific image effect with different effect patterns based on the display color of the specific image (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the step In S2804 and S2811, the effect patterns (PT1 to PT4) can be determined based on the color tone (blue, red, rainbow). Thereby, the production effect of specific image production can be improved.

  In this embodiment, in the pseudo light guide plate effect, it is possible to select each effect pattern regardless of the color tone. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as being provided. For example, if the color tone is “blue”, an effect pattern in which the pseudo light guide plate image blinks at a low speed is selected. If “red”, an effect pattern in which the pseudo light guide plate image blinks at a high speed is selected. If there is, an effect pattern in which the pseudo light guide plate image is turned on may be selected. A plurality of dedicated effect patterns may be provided for one color tone, and the pseudo light guide plate effect may be executed using any one of the dedicated effect patterns.

  In this embodiment, the layer of the effect display device 9 is provided as shown in FIG. 30, but the specific example is not limited to this. For example, the special display layer may include a plurality of layers having different display priorities. For example, a first special display layer that displays the fourth symbol, a second special display layer that displays the small symbol, and a third special display layer that displays the abnormality notification image are provided, and the display priority is the third special display. Layer> second special display layer> first special display layer may be satisfied.

  Similarly, for example, the normal display layer may include a plurality of layers having different display priorities. For example, a first normal display layer that displays a background, a second normal display layer that displays an effect design, a third normal display layer that displays an image of a notice effect A, and a fourth that displays an image of a notice effect B A normal display layer, a fifth normal display layer for displaying a hold display or an active display (display corresponding to a change during execution), a sixth normal display layer for displaying an effect for the hold display or the active display, and these normal display layers A seventh normal display layer for displaying a mask to be applied, and the display priority is the seventh normal display layer> the sixth normal display layer> the fifth normal display layer> the fourth normal display layer> the third normal display layer> The second normal display layer may be greater than the first normal display layer.

  Further, in this embodiment, the pattern in the first pseudo light guide plate effect that can be executed before reach is different from the pattern in the second pseudo light guide plate effect that can be executed after reach. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, a common pattern may be displayed in the pseudo light guide plate effect before reach and the pseudo light guide plate effect after reach.

  In this embodiment, one pseudo light guide plate image (character, character) is determined for each type of pseudo light guide plate effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of pseudo light guide plate images may be provided in the first pseudo light guide plate effect, and different pseudo light guide plate images may be displayed based on the reliability with respect to the big hit.

  In addition, although explanation is omitted in this embodiment, an operation promotion display that prompts the player to perform an action (for example, a push operation on the push button 120 or the trigger button 121, a tilt operation on the stick controller 122, an operation on the touch panel). It may be performed by the effect display device 9. In that case, the action promoting image may be displayed on the special display layer, or the action promoting image may be displayed on the normal display layer.

  For example, the display layer for displaying the action promotion image may be different depending on the type of the action promotion effect for displaying the action promotion image. Specifically, when a highly reliable operation effect indicating that the reliability for the big hit is high when the player's operation is detected, an operation instruction image is displayed on the special display layer, while the player's operation is displayed. When a low-reliability operation effect that does not indicate that the reliability for the big hit is high is detected, an operation instruction image may be displayed on the normal display layer. As a result, when the operation instruction image and the pseudo light guide plate image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the operation instruction image can be displayed with priority over the pseudo light guide plate image if the operation instruction image is highly reliable, and the low reliability If it is an operation effect, the pseudo light guide plate image can be displayed with priority over the operation instruction image.

  Further, for example, the display layer for displaying the motion promotion image may be different depending on the timing of displaying the motion promotion image. Specifically, when the operation promotion display is performed when the pseudo light guide plate effect is not being executed, the operation instruction image is displayed on the special display layer, while the operation promotion display is performed while the pseudo light guide plate effect is being executed. May display an operation instruction image on the normal display layer. As a result, when the operation instruction image and the pseudo light guide plate image are displayed in an overlapping manner, the operation instruction image can be displayed with priority over the pseudo light guide plate image when the operation instruction display is performed first. When the pseudo light guide plate effect is being executed, the pseudo light guide plate image can be displayed with priority over the operation instruction image.

  In addition, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, in the case of the fluctuation accompanied by the pseudo-continuous, the pseudo light guide plate effect may be repeatedly executed every time the re-change is performed. In that case, it is preferable not to select a color tone or effect pattern that shows a lower reliability than the reliability indicated by the pseudo light guide plate effect executed immediately before. Specifically, when re-variation is performed after executing the first pseudo light guide plate effect having a color tone of “red”, the first pseudo light guide plate effect having a color tone of “blue” is not executed after the re-change. It is good. For example, in the case of a change in which re-change is performed twice, before the first re-change, after the first re-change and before the second re-change, and after the second re-change, Although the light guide plate effect can be executed, the first first pseudo light guide plate color tone is “blue”, the second first pseudo light guide plate color tone is “red”, and the third first pseudo light guide plate color tone. The color tone of the effect may be “rainbow”, the color tone of the first and second first light guide plate effects may be “blue”, and the color tone of the third first light guide plate effect may be “red”. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged even when a sense of expectation is once given.

  In this embodiment, the pseudo light guide plate effect using a plurality of display layers among the display layers for the pseudo light guide plate effect (base, 1 to 5 layers) is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the pseudo light guide plate effect that displays only one of the display layers may be executable.

  Although not described in this embodiment, the image processing apparatus includes a detecting unit that detects the occurrence of abnormality, and the specific image effect executing unit displays an abnormality notification image on the front side of the specific image during execution of the specific image effect. It may be possible. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 1 below. Note that description of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment is omitted.

  For example, in the first modified example, the CPU 56 receives an abnormal winning (for example, winning a big winning opening when it is not a big hit), opening the glass door frame 2, excessively storing game balls in the upper plate, or abnormal magnetism or abnormal. The occurrence of abnormality such as radio waves can be detected, and when the occurrence of abnormality is detected, the effect control CPU 101 displays an abnormality notification indicating that the abnormality has occurred on the special display layer of the effect display device 9. To do. Thereby, the pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed without disturbing the visual recognition of the abnormality notification, and the effect of the specific image effect (pseudo light guide plate effect) can be improved.

  In the first modification, the display layer for displaying the abnormality notification may be changed depending on the type of abnormality that has occurred. For example, if a minor abnormality (for example, too much game balls accumulate on the upper plate) occurs, an abnormality notification is displayed on the normal display layer, while if a serious abnormality (other abnormality) occurs, an abnormality is displayed. The notification may be displayed on the special display layer. In this way, when a minor abnormality occurs, the pseudo light guide plate image is displayed with priority over the abnormality notification, so that the deterioration of the effect of the pseudo light guide plate effect can be prevented. When it occurs, it is possible to reliably notify the occurrence of the abnormality by displaying the abnormality notification in preference to the pseudo light guide plate image.

  Although not described in this embodiment, the embodiment includes launching means capable of launching a game medium toward the game area, and the specific image effect executing means includes the first path in the game area and An instruction notification image for instructing which of the second paths different from the first path should be used for launching the game medium may be displayed on the front side of the specific image. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 2 below. Note that description of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment is omitted.

  For example, in the second modification, the gaming machine has a first start winning opening 13 on a first path along which a game ball launched on the substantially left side of the gaming area 7 flows down, and a game on which the first starting winning opening 13 is launched on the substantially right side of the gaming area 7. The gate 32 and the second start winning opening 14 are respectively arranged on the second path along which the ball flows down, and an instruction notification image (so-called right-handed notification image) instructing the launch of the game ball on the second route in the high base state. ) May be displayed on the special display layer of the effect display device 9. In addition, for a predetermined period after switching to the low base state, an instruction notification image instructing launching of the game ball on the first route may be displayed on the special display layer of the effect display device 9. Thereby, the pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed without hindering the visual recognition of the instruction notification image, and the effect of the specific image effect (pseudo light guide plate effect) can be improved.

  In addition, although explanation is omitted in this embodiment, it may be a gaming machine capable of effect adjustment related to a game (for example, volume adjustment, brightness adjustment, mode switching, etc.) in accordance with the player's operation. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 3 below. Note that description of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment is omitted.

  In the third modification example, the effect control CPU 101 executes a sound volume status display process before executing any one of steps S800 to S807 of the effect control process shown in FIG. The volume status display process includes a process for displaying the adjustment status of the volume adjustment. Specifically, the volume status display process is performed in a gaming state other than the super reach effect, or in a state waiting for a customer and not displaying an error (first state), whether or not the player operates the stick controller 122 or the like. Regardless of this, it includes a process for displaying a volume status display image VL showing the adjustment status of the volume adjustment on the display screen of the effect display device 9 so as to be visible.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the volume status display process in the third modification. In the volume status display process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the super reach effect is being performed (step S601). In the process of step S601, for example, it may be confirmed whether or not the change is a super reach change pattern and a reach effect period.

  When the super reach effect is not being performed in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S602). The super reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 122 during the super reach performance.

  If the super reach operation flag is not set to the on state in step S602 (step S602; No), display control for displaying the volume status display on the effect display device 9 is executed (step S603). For example, a volume status display image VL as a volume status display is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. That is, the volume status display image VL indicating the current volume output level is displayed. For example, the volume status display image VL is an image display in a mode in which five rectangular image display sections arranged side by side are left-lit, and in FIG. 48, three five image display sections from the left end are displayed. It is an image display in a mode in which minutes are lit.

  Specifically, when the sound volume is a predetermined minimum level (the sound volume output is a low sound level that is suppressed more than usual and not the mute level), the image display is such that all five image display sections are turned off. Note that the lowest level may be the mute level. Further, in the case of the first level that is one level higher than the lowest level, the image display is in the form in which the leftmost image display section is lit. In the case of the second level, which is one level higher than the first level, the image display is in a state in which two image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of a third level (that is, a normal level) that is one level higher than the second level, the image display is in a state in which three image display sections from the left end are lit. In the case of the fourth level, which is one higher than the third level, the image display is in a state in which four image display sections from the left end are lit. Further, in the case of the maximum level (fifth level), the image display is performed in such a manner that all five image display sections are lit. Thus, the player can grasp the current volume output level by looking at the volume status display image VL. In the third modification, the volume status display image VL has a meter-type display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of a numerical formula or a color-type display mode (for example, blue → green) is not limited thereto. It is possible to use various display modes, such as changing from yellow to red in order of the display to indicate that the red color is larger.

  If the super reach operation flag is set (ON state) in step S602 (step S602; Yes), display control for causing the effect display device 9 to continue displaying the volume status (displaying the volume status display image VL). Is executed (step S604), and the super reach operation flag is reset to an off state (step S605). Steps S604 and S605 are processes for continuing the volume status display when the volume change operation is performed immediately before the end of the super reach effect. Thereby, the volume status display image VL displayed by performing the volume change operation immediately before the end of the super reach effect can be continuously displayed after the end of the super reach effect, and once at the end timing of the super reach effect. It can be prevented from being erased.

  After executing the process of step S603 or after executing the process of step S605, the presence / absence of a volume change operation is determined (step S606). If there is a volume change operation (step S606; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S607). Specifically, when the tilt direction sensor unit 123 detects that the player has operated the stick controller 122 (step S606; Yes), the changed volume state display image VL is displayed on the effect display device 9. The display control is executed, the changed volume setting value is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume setting is performed such that the audio output board 70 is controlled so that the changed volume is output from the speaker 27 (step S607). ).

  For example, the stick controller 122 can be operated in the left-right direction, and when the player operates the stick controller 122 once in the right direction, the changed volume state display image VL in which the lighting state of the image display section is increased by one is displayed. While being displayed on the effect display device 9, the volume output from the speaker 27 is increased by one level. On the contrary, when the player operates the stick controller 122 once in the left direction, the changed volume state display image VL in which the lighting state of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the effect display device 9. The volume output from the speaker 27 is lowered by one level.

  After executing the process of step S607, it is determined whether or not the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S608). The non-super-reach operation flag is a flag that is turned on when the player operates the stick controller 122 at a time other than during super-reach production.

  On the other hand, when there is no volume change operation (step S606; No), it is determined whether or not the operation flag other than the super reach is set to the on state (step S609).

  After executing the process of step S608 or when the non-super-reach operation flag is set to ON in step S609 (step S609; Yes), a predetermined period after the operation (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (step S610). When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S610; Yes), the non-super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S611). The predetermined period after the operation (for example, 3 seconds) may be until the predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses after the first operation, or when the operation is performed a plurality of times within the predetermined period, from the last operation. It may be until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses. In the third modification, the predetermined period after the operation is set, but the predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) may elapse from the start of displaying the volume state display image VL.

  Returning to step S601, if the super reach effect is being performed (step S601; Yes), it is determined whether or not the non-super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S612). When the non-super-reach operation flag is in an off state (step S612; No), it is determined whether or not the super-reach operation flag is set in an on state (step S613). When the super reach operation flag is in the off state (step S613; No), a process for deleting the volume status display is executed (step S614). Steps S613 and S614 are processing for preventing the volume status from being displayed during the super reach production in principle. Specifically, in the second state in which the super reach effect (specific effect) is executed, that is, in the game state during the super reach effect, the volume status display image VL is not displayed on the effect display device 9 unless requested by the player. (Volume status display image VL is erased). Thus, the volume status display image VL can be prevented from being displayed during the execution of the super reach effect which is an example of the game effect (the effect including an important notice) that the player particularly wants to show, and the effect of the super reach effect can be prevented. Can be suppressed.

  When the non-super-reach operation flag is off in step S609 (step S609; No), if the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation in step S610 (step S610; No), the process of step S611 is executed. After that, when the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S612 (step S612; Yes), the super-reach operation flag is set to the on state in step S613 (step S613). ; Yes), after executing the process of step S614, the volume state display process is terminated.

  Note that according to the volume state display process (step S162) shown in FIG. 46, the volume state display image VL can be displayed even in the customer waiting state.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a temporary display process in the third modification. The temporary display process is a process executed when a super reach effect is executed during a change. In the temporary display process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S701). When the non-super-reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S701; Yes), it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S702). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S702; No), the presence / absence of a volume changing operation is determined (step S703).

  If there is a volume change operation (step S703; Yes), the changed volume status display (display of the changed volume status display image VL) and the changed volume setting are executed (step S704). In this step S704, when the tilt direction sensor unit 123 detects that the player has operated the stick controller 122 (for example, operated in the left direction or the right direction), the volume status display image VL after being changed to the effect display device 9 is displayed. Is displayed, and the changed volume setting value is stored, and the changed sound volume setting is performed such that the sound output board 70 is controlled so that the changed sound volume is output from the speaker 27 (step). S704).

  On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S702; Yes), a volume status display erasure process for erasing the volume status display image VL displayed on the effect display device 9 is executed (step S705). The non-super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S706).

  When the non-super-reach operation flag is off at step S701 (step S701; No), when there is no volume change operation at step S703 (step S703; No), after executing the process of step S704, After executing the process of step S706, it is determined whether or not the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S707).

  If the super reach operation flag is off in step S707 (step S707; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation start is accepted (step S708). If the operation start is accepted in step S708 (step S708; Yes), that is, if the tilt direction sensor unit 123 detects that the player has operated the stick controller 122, the current volume is displayed on the effect display device 9. Display control for displaying the status display image VL is executed (step S709). As shown in FIG. 48D, during the super reach effect, the current sound volume status display image VL is displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the operation of the stick controller 122. After executing the process of step S709, the super reach operation flag is set to the on state (step S710).

  When the super-reach operation flag is ON in step S707 (step S707; Yes), or after executing the process of step S710, it is determined whether a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the operation (step S707). Step S711). If the predetermined period has not elapsed after the operation (step S711; No), it is determined whether or not a volume change operation has been performed (step S712). When there is a volume change operation (step S712; Yes), the display of the changed volume status display image VL and the changed volume setting are executed (step S713). Specifically, when the tilt direction sensor unit 123 detects that the player has operated the stick controller 122 in the left-right direction (step S712; Yes), it corresponds to the number of operations of the stick controller 122 in the left-right direction. Display control for displaying the changed volume status display image VL on the effect display device 9 is executed, and the changed volume setting value corresponding to the number of operations is stored in the RAM 122, and the changed volume output is output from the speaker 27. The changed sound volume setting such as controlling the audio output board 70 is executed (step S607).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), when the player operates the stick controller 122 once in the right direction, the lighting state of the image display section is increased by one, and the volume state display image VL after the change (fourth level) Is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the volume output from the speaker 27 is increased by one level. Contrary to the above, when the player operates the stick controller 122 once in the left direction, the changed volume state display image VL in which the lighting state of the image display section is reduced by one is displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, the sound volume output from the speaker 27 is lowered by one level.

  When a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation (step S711; Yes), a process for deleting the volume status display is executed (step S714). For example, as shown in FIG. 48F, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the display of the volume state display image VL is erased. That is, the volume status display is not displayed. In this way, during the super reach production, if there is a player's operation, the volume status display image VL is temporarily displayed, and if the predetermined period has elapsed after the operation, the volume status display is still in progress. The image VL is erased.

  After executing the process of step S714, the super-reach operation flag is reset to the off state (step S715). Then, when no operation start is accepted at step S708 (step S708; No), when there is no volume change operation at step S712 (step S712; No), after the processing of step S713 is executed, or after step S715. After executing the process, the temporary display process is terminated.

  Next, a case where a volume change operation is performed in the super reach variation display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 illustrates an effect example in the case where there is a volume change operation in the super reach variation display in the third modification. In this execution example, the active display change effect is executed, and the display mode of the active display becomes “red” as shown in FIG. 48A, and the variable display state of the decorative symbols is reached as shown in FIG. This is explained from the fact that the state (reach has been established). Further, by the volume status display process, a volume status display image VL is displayed on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG.

  48B, the reach effect in the super reach as shown in FIG. 48C is executed. An effect image as shown in FIG. 48C (for example, an image using characters “super reach”) is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 9 to notify the super reach. The player can grasp that the super reach production is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (C), the variable display of the decorative symbols is reduced and displayed at the upper left portion of the screen of the effect display device 9. Further, the volume status display image VL is erased from the screen of the effect display device 9 by the volume status display deletion process (step S614) as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 48C, the hold display is deleted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 48D, when the stick controller 122 is operated during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed. Then, when the player operates the stick controller 122 once in the right direction, as shown in FIG. 48 (E), the lit state of the image display section is increased by one, and the volume state display image VL after the change is made. (Volume status display image VL at the fourth level) is displayed on the effect display device 9, and the volume output from the speaker 27 increases by one level (becomes the fourth level volume output). Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the operation, the volume status display image VL is deleted as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (H), the battle effect result (here, for example, the battle defeat result) is displayed through FIG. 48 (D), and the super reach effect is completed, for example, as shown in FIG. 48 (I). The final stop symbol of the reach combination is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (I), since the super reach effect is finished, the changed volume state display image VL is displayed and the hold display is restored.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 48D and 48E, the volume status display image VL in the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect is other than the super reach effect as shown in FIG. Since the display is the same as the display state of the volume state display image VL in the gaming state (first state), the display of the volume state display image VL in the second state can be easily understood. As described above, the first state and the second state may not be the same. For example, the volume state display image VL in the second state may display [1] a different display from the volume state display image VL in the first state at the same display location as in the first state, or [2] The same display as the volume state display image VL in the first state may be displayed at a different display location from that in the first state, or [3] the first display different from the volume state display image VL in the first state. You may display in the display location different from the case of a state.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third modification, in the game state (first state) other than during the super reach effect, the volume is controlled regardless of whether or not the player has operated the stick controller 122 (player operation). Since the status display image VL (volume adjustment status) is displayed on the effect display device 9 so as to be visible, the volume status display image VL can always be viewed in the gaming state other than during the super reach effect. Further, in the game state (second state) during the super reach effect in which the super reach effect (specific effect) is executed, the volume status display image VL is not visible and the player operates the stick controller 122. Displays the volume status display image VL based on the player's operation of the stick controller 122 until a predetermined period elapses after the operation (until a predetermined condition is satisfied). That is, in the gaming state during the super reach effect, the display of the volume status display image VL can be minimized. Thereby, the volume state display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the reduction in the effect of the super reach effect (specific effect), and the fun of the game can be improved.

  The specific effect is an effect (for example, a super reach effect) that suggests that the player is in an advantageous state. For this reason, while suppressing the fall of the production effect about a super reach production, the volume condition display image VL can be displayed according to a player's request, and the interest property of a game can be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 48 (I), the volume status display image VL is displayed at a position not covered by the decorative pattern at the time of stoppage of variation, so that the final stop symbol of the decorative pattern, that is, the game result can be visually confirmed. The volume can be adjusted while not obstructing.

  In the game state (second state) during the super reach effect, the volume state display image VL is displayed for a predetermined period (or a predetermined period from the start of display of the volume state display image VL) from the detection of the operation of the stick controller 122 by the player. Since it is displayed, the display of the volume status display image VL can be minimized. Thereby, the volume state display image VL can be displayed according to the player's request while suppressing the reduction in the effect of the super reach effect (specific effect), and the fun of the game can be improved.

  In this modified example 3, the first state is a gaming state other than during the super reach production, but the period before the super reach production (before the start) or after the super reach production (after the end) It may be in any state. In addition, the first state may be at least one of a period before the execution of the super reach effect in one change (before the start) or a period after the execution of the super reach effect in one change (after the end). In addition, the second state may be a state of a period for executing the super reach effect in one change.

  Further, according to the player's operation of the stick controller 122 (player's action) before the game state (first state) other than during the super reach effect is shifted to the game state (second state) during the super reach effect. When the display of the volume state display image VL for volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started and the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the state is shifted from the first state to the second state, that is, the super reach effect is being performed, but a predetermined period after the operation. If (3 seconds) has not elapsed, the display of the volume status display image VL is extended until a predetermined period has elapsed since the detection or transition of the player's motion, so the display of the volume status display image VL is super Even after reaching reach, it can be extended for a predetermined period. That is, it is possible to prevent the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment started just before the start of the super reach production from being terminated halfway at the start timing of the super reach production, and the display of the volume status display image VL is erased midway. You can prevent the uncomfortable feeling of being done. Further, it is not necessary for the player to operate the stick controller 122 again immediately after the start of the super reach effect, and a user-friendly gaming machine can be provided.

  Contrary to the above, the operation of the player's stick controller 122 (the player's operation) before the transition from the gaming state (second state) during the super reach effect to the gaming state (first state) other than during the super reach effect. Display of the volume status display image VL for volume adjustment (effect adjustment) is started according to the operation), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the state transitions from the second state to the first state, that is, the super reach effect ends. When the game state other than the super reach effect is entered but the predetermined period (3 seconds) has not elapsed since the operation, the display of the volume status display image VL is continued even after the transition to the first state. A process of deleting the display of the volume status display image VL when the period has elapsed can be eliminated. In other words, since the volume status display image VL is always displayed in the first state, it is possible to omit a useless process of erasing the volume status display image VL once when a predetermined period has elapsed and starting display again. In addition, it is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling that the display of the volume state display image VL disappears for a moment at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed.

  Further, the details of the control of the gaming machine described in the above-described embodiment (when the predetermined image is displayed while the predetermined image is reduced in visibility while the predetermined image is displayed) The content that it is possible to execute a specific image effect displayed in a superimposed manner) may be applied to the gaming machine described in the third modification. For example, the pseudo light guide plate effect can be executed, and in the first state, the adjustment status is displayed so as to be visible regardless of the player's action, and the second state is a state different from the first state and executes the specific effect. Then, the adjustment status may be difficult or impossible to see, and the adjustment status may be displayed until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the player's action. In this case, when the display of the volume status display image VL and the display of the pseudo light guide plate effect are performed in an overlapping manner, the display of the volume status display image VL is displayed with higher priority than the pseudo light guide plate image (pseudo). The volume status display image VL may be displayed in a layer having a higher display priority than the light guide plate effect display layer.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In addition, about embodiment mentioned above, although the game machine (what is called a 1st type game machine) which transfers to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result of a special symbol and an effect design was demonstrated, the variable provided in the game area | region was demonstrated. A gaming machine (so-called second type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the winning of a gaming ball (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a winning ball apparatus (so-called role) It is good also as applying in the game machine which combined 1st type and 2nd type.

  Further, in this embodiment, although it is possible to shift to the probability change state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, it is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a ball does not easily pass.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., 1 Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above embodiment, “the ratios are different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not the game is a big hit and determines whether or not the variation pattern type is winning (pre-reading determination), and shows a command (symbol designation command) indicating the winning determination result , A variation category command) is transmitted, and the pre-run announcement effect is executed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. Further, it may be configured such that determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) is performed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the time of starting winning. In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 100 side may be configured to make a winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on random number values specified by these commands.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other examples described later.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown to the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that is capable of playing a game, and has a plurality of stage effect modes (for example, first to fourth effect modes, see FIG. 92) with different degrees of expectation. A first effect (for example, an effect effect effect image) can be displayed by a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect (for example, an effect effect) and a display mode corresponding to the special effect, and the degree of expectation is high. Display means capable of displaying a second image (for example, active display or hold display) different from the first image by a plurality of different display modes, and a predetermined image (for example, a normal effect image such as an effect pattern or a background) During execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a normal effect such as a changing effect), a specific image (for example, a pseudo light guide plate image) is displayed more than the predetermined image in a state in which the visibility of the predetermined image is reduced. Front (For example, a pseudo light guide plate effect display layer that is superimposed on a display layer having a higher display priority than a normal display layer that displays a normal effect image). And the display means can display the first image and the second image in a manner in which at least a part thereof is superimposed (see FIGS. 96 and 97). The two images are set to have higher image display priority than the first image (see FIGS. 96 and 97), and the identification information (for example, the fourth symbol, the small symbol) on the front side of the specific image. Can be displayed.

  According to the above gaming machine, interest can be improved. In addition, the player can be prevented from being confused. In particular, if the specific image effect and the special effect are executed during one variable display, the player's attention can be more attracted and the interest can be further improved. Furthermore, even if the first image and the second image are displayed in a superimposed manner, the second image has a high image display priority, so that the player can easily identify the second image, and in addition to the specific image, Since the identification information can be displayed on the front side, the player can be prevented from erroneously recognizing the game state in the middle of the game, and the player can be more prevented from being confused.

  In the gaming machine, the specific image effect and the special effect may be executed simultaneously during one variable display, or one may be executed first and then the other. Further, only the specific image effect may be executed during one variable display, or only the special effect may be executed.

  In the gaming machine, the identification information may be displayed while the specific image effect is being executed and the special effect is being executed.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that can improve the interest and prevent the player from being confused, it is a gaming machine that performs a game and has a plurality of stage effects (for example, different expectations) (for example, , First to fourth effect modes (refer to FIG. 92), special effect execution means (simply referred to as “effect means”) capable of executing a special effect (sometimes referred to as “specific effect”) (for example, an effect effect). And a first image (sometimes referred to as “corresponding image”) (for example, an effect effect effect image) in a display mode corresponding to a specific effect, and a plurality of stages with different expectations. Display means (for example, an effect display device 909) capable of displaying a second image (sometimes referred to as “predetermined image”) (for example, active display or hold display). The first image and the second image can be displayed in such a manner that at least a part thereof is superimposed (see FIGS. 96 and 97), and the second image image has a priority of image display compared to the first image. Is set high (see FIG. 96, FIG. 97). Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, an overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 49 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 viewed from the front. This other form example may be referred to as a “first form example”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape that is provided on the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. And the board 906).

  A hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 903 is provided on the lower surface of the glass door frame 902. Under the hitting ball supply tray 903, an extra ball receiving tray 904 that stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 903, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 905 that emits hitting balls are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 906 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 907 is formed on the front surface of the game board 906 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  In the vicinity of the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. The display screen of the effect display device 909 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas. However, the position of the symbol display area may not be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 908a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 909 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 908a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 908b, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  In addition, in the effect display device 909, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched An effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as “reach states”) is referred to as “reach effect”. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as “reach mode”. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is referred to as “reach variable display”. Then, when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 909 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 909, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying the fourth symbol after the effect symbol, the special symbol described later, and the normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol in which the variation of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, which will be described later, and the second special symbol. A fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side by the variation pattern command). In the case of performing an effect using the effect display device 909, for example, an effect in which the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as being performed or effects where the moving object shields all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 909 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the current variation display is being performed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Can be reliably recognized. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 909c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The fourth symbol display area 909d for symbols may be collectively referred to as “fourth symbol display area”.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol. “Variable display is synchronized” means that the start time and end time of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red, and the type of big hit (the display color may be different depending on whether it is a normal big hit or a probable big hit). When the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol (display color different from the off-set) For example, it is displayed in blue when it is off, but it is displayed in red when it is a big hit. The display color may remain different depending on which of the jackpots.) The display color when the 4th symbol display areas 909c and 909d are turned off is the background when the lights are turned off. In order to prevent the image from being assimilated and disappearing, it is desirable that the display color be different from the background image (for example, black).

  In this embodiment, the case where the fourth symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is shown. You may make it implement | achieve a 4th symbol display area. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. And a common fourth symbol display area may be provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 909. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 906, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 906, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b that variably displays a second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 908b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 908b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. The first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as “special symbol”. ) ".

  In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 9013 or the second start winning opening) After passing 9014 (including winning), a variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first start winning port 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the first start opening switch 9013a.

  A variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning port 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 9013. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 9014 is guided to the back of the game board 906 and detected by the second start opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by a solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 9014 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, it is easier for a game ball to win the second start winning port 9014 than the first starting winning port 9013. Further, in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning port 9014. Accordingly, in a state where the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning opening 9013 than the second starting winning opening 9014. Note that in a state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, it may be configured such that although it is difficult to win, it is possible to win (that is, the game ball is difficult to win).

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as “start winning opening” or “start opening”.

  When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading toward the variable winning ball device 9015 is very likely to win the second start winning port 9014. The first start winning opening 9013 is provided directly below the effect display device 909, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 909 and the first start winning port 9013 is further reduced, or the first start winning port is opened. The nail arrangement around 9013, or the nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 9013 makes it difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013, and the winning rate of the second start winning opening 9014 You may make it make higher than the winning rate of the 1st start winning opening 9013.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, a variable winning ball device 9015 that opens and closes only with respect to the second start winning opening 9014 is provided. Any of the winning openings 9014 may be provided with a variable winning ball apparatus that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of valid winning balls entered into the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as “start memory” or “start prize memory”). ) Is displayed, a first special symbol reservation storage display 9018a is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 9018a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol reservation storage indicator 9018b comprising four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered into the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the second reserved storage number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 9018b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Also, at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a first hold memory display unit 909a for displaying the first hold memory number and a second hold memory display unit 909b for displaying the second hold memory number are provided. ing. The first hold storage display unit 909a displays a first hold display corresponding to each of the first hold storage. The second hold storage display unit 909b displays a second hold display corresponding to each of the second hold memories. In this example, the case where the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are individually displayed is shown, but the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is the total pending. You may comprise so that the total pending | holding memory | storage display part which displays the memory | storage number may be provided. With this configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not been met. Further, in such a configuration, the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory are displayed side by side in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 in the combined hold storage display unit. So that it can be recognized whether it is the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in red and the second reserved memory is displayed in blue). It may be configured.

  In addition, an active display in which a specific display corresponding to the currently running variable display is displayed between the first hold storage display unit 909a and the second hold storage display unit 909b at the bottom of the display screen of the effect display device 909. A region 909F is provided. In this form example, in the active display area 909F, a display in the same manner as the hold display displayed on the first hold storage display unit 909a and the second hold storage display unit 909b is performed as the specific display. Hereinafter, the display in the same manner as the hold display displayed in the active display area 909F is also referred to as “active display”. For example, in the state where the first reserved memory number is 3 and three first reserved displays are displayed on the first reserved memory display unit 909a, when the first start winning is newly generated, the first reserved memory number is The hold display corresponding to the first start winning that is increased by 1 is displayed as the fourth first hold display. Thereafter, each time the variable display is completed, the hold display is shifted, and the hold display corresponding to the first start winning is the third first hold display → the second first hold display → 1. It is displayed as the first first hold display. When the variable display corresponding to the first start winning is started, the first first hold display is erased and the active display corresponding to the variable display is displayed. At this time, the active display is displayed in succession to the erased first hold display mode. Thereafter, when the variable display ends, the active display is deleted. Note that the active display is not necessarily a display in the same manner as the hold display as long as it can be recognized as a display corresponding to the currently executed variable display, and is configured by other figures or characters. May be.

  In this embodiment, the “specific display corresponding to the variable display” includes an active display displayed in the active display area 909F, and a hold displayed on the first hold storage display unit 909a and the second hold storage display unit 909b. Applicable to display. Note that the specific display is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and may be a display that includes at least a holding display and that corresponds to a variable display in some form. In this embodiment, the active display area 909F is configured to display active display. However, it is not always necessary to perform active display, and the active display area 909F may not be provided.

  In addition, on the lower left side of the display screen of the effect display device 909, a fourth hold display unit 909e that displays the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number in a recognizable manner is provided. On the fourth hold display portion 909e, two numerical values are displayed at the top and bottom, the upper numerical value corresponds to the first reserved stored number, and the lower numerical value corresponds to the second reserved stored number. In this example, either the first hold display or the second hold display is not displayed depending on the game state, but by checking the display of the fourth hold display portion 909e, any game state can be obtained. In addition, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be confirmed. The first hold storage display unit 909a and the second hold storage display unit 909b are used when an effect such as a super reach effect, which will be described later, or a blackout notice effect in which the display screen of the effect display device 909 becomes black is executed. Although not displayed, the fourth hold display section 909e is continuously displayed even when those effects are executed. Therefore, the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number can be confirmed even when the effect as described above is executed.

  The effect display device 909 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 908b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a is synchronized with the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b is synchronized with the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909. In addition, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect display device 909 causes the jackpot to be recalled. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 90560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and is received by the effect control microcomputer 90100. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 909, a movable member 9078 that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 9086 and moves when the motor 9086 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 9078 operates when a notice effect (movable object notice effect) or a super reach effect is executed. Note that the movable member 9078 may be operated in a pseudo-continuous production, for example, in addition to the movable object notice production and the super reach production.

  In addition, below the effect display device 909, a movable member 9090 with an effect LED is provided. Although details will be described later, the effect LED movable member 9090 is configured such that the effect LED 9090a that is mounted can be lit in a plurality of modes (for example, blue, yellow, green, and red). Further, the effect LED movable member 9090 is configured to be rotatable (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise) when the movable member motor 9090b rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 49, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 includes an opening / closing plate, and when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, and a specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be opened by the solenoid 9021 in the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. A game ball that has won a big winning opening is detected by a count switch 9023.

  The game area 906 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 9029, 9030, 9033, 9039 for paying out a predetermined number of prize game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls that have won the winning ports 9029, 9030, 9033, 9039 are detected by the winning port switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a.

  A normal symbol display 9010 is provided on the right side of the game board 906. The normal symbol display 9010 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 9014). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time there is a game ball passing through the gate 9032, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. Further, a probability variation state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is higher (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of displaying a special symbol is higher than that in the normal state. In the high probability state.), The probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased.

  Decorative LEDs 9025 flashing during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out-port 9026 into which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in at the bottom. In addition, two speakers 9027 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 903 are provided with operation buttons 90120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 90120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. Note that the operation button 90120 is not only provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also provided with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can perform a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating a ball striking operation handle 905 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 907. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 907 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 908a starts variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 9013. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 9014 and is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (eg, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 908b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 9014. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when the probable big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probable state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, a special symbol display). Transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the variable display execution conditions in the devices 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909 are easily established. In the case of the high base state, for example, the frequency that the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is increased or the time that the variable winning ball device 9015 is open is extended compared to the case where the high base state is not high. It becomes easier to win a start.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display 9010 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol, or when the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 9010 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is won increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  Further, in this embodiment, when the transition is made to the high base state, the transition is also made to the short time state (special symbol short time state) in which the variation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or effect symbol is shortened. By shifting to the short time state in this way, the variation time of the special symbol and the production symbol is shortened, so the frequency of the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol is increased (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory is reduced). It is possible to reduce the situation that an invalid start prize is generated. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 9031. 50 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 90560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 9055 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built in the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 9056 and the RAM 9055, and the ROM 9054 may be external or built-in. Further, the I / O port unit 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 further includes a random number circuit 9053 for generating hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means that is partly or wholly backed up by a backup power source created in the power supply substrate 90910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 90560, the CPU 9056 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 9054. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or the CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on a board other than the main board 9031.

  The random number circuit 9053 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 9053 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 9053 has a numeric data update range selection / setting function (initial value selection / setting function and upper limit selection / setting function), numeric data update rule selection / setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using an ID number of the game control microcomputer 90560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 9054 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 90560). The numerical data obtained in this way is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 9053. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 9053 can be further improved.

  In addition, an input driver circuit 58 for providing the game control microcomputer 90560 with detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the start port switch 9013a, the count switch 9023, and the winning port switches 9029a, 9030a, 9033a, 9039a is also mounted on the main board 9031. Yes. In addition, an output circuit 9059 for driving a solenoid 9016 for opening and closing the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 and a solenoid 9021 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball apparatus 9020 for forming a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also provided. 9031.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 9010 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control is performed on the display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and the normal symbol hold storage display 9041.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. The control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 909 that variably displays the effect symbol is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080 controls the display of the decoration LED 9025 provided on the game board and the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled via the sound output board 9070.

  FIG. 51 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070, only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 9080 has an effect control CPU 90101 and an effect control microcomputer 90100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to perform display control of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 90109 that performs display control of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 90101 outputs to the VDP 90109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect symbols), and background image data. ROM. The VDP 90109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 90101. The VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 allows the signal input from the relay board 9077 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  The relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (no signal is passed in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077) as signal direction regulating means. The unidirectional circuit 9074 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 51 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is restricted. That is, a signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (the game control microcomputer 90560 side). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port unit 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the motor 9086 to operate the movable member 9078 via the output port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a motor 9087 for operating the effect blades 9079a and 9079b via the output port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives a movable member motor 9090 b for operating the effect LED-attached movable member 9090 via the output port 90106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs a signal from the operation button 90120 via the input port 90107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 90120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

  In the lamp driver board 9035, a signal for driving the LED and the lamp is input to the LED / lamp driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED / lamp driver 90352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 9028 based on a signal for driving the LED or the lamp. Further, current is supplied to the decoration LED 9025 and the effect LED 9090a provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesizing IC 90703 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706, to the speaker 9027. The audio data ROM 90704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, the CPU 9056) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step 90S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S903). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S904), the RAM is accessible (Step S905). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 9056 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S906). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes normal initialization processing (steps S9010 to S9015).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S907). If it is confirmed that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 9056 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S908). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process (steps S9041 to S9043) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing in steps S9041 and S9042, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (usually big hit, probability change big hit, sudden probability change big hit, small hit, or off) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 9080 (steps). S44). Then, control goes to a step S9014. In step S9044, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 9056 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 61). You may make it do. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the saved variable time timer value is resumed to resume the special symbol fluctuation display, When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value to be described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Instead of always sending the display result designation command when the power failure is restored, the CPU 9056 may first check whether the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0 or not. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set as a pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

  By the processing in steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a normal symbol per-determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. A value is set.

  In addition, the CPU 9056 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 90560 has executed initialization processing). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S9013). For example, when receiving the initialization designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 causes the effect display device 909 to display a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  In addition, the CPU 9056 executes random number circuit setting processing for initial setting of the random number circuit 9053 (step S9014). For example, the CPU 9056 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 9053 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S9010 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S9016), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt permitted state is set. Setting is performed (step S9019). In this example, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number determines the initial value of the count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win a normal symbol (ordinary random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to do. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 90100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process in steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and the state determination is performed (switch processing: step S9021). ).

  Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. Display control processing for performing display control of the on-hold storage display 9041 is executed (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b and the normal symbol display 9010, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Execute control.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per normal symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024 and S9025).

  Furthermore, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol process processing (step S9026). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 9056 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state. In the normal symbol process in step S9027, the normal symbol variation display is executed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball to the gate 9032, and the variation display result is derived and displayed, or the normal symbol variation display result is displayed. When the winning is achieved, the variable winning ball apparatus 9015 is controlled to be opened or closed.

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: step S9028).

  Furthermore, the CPU 9056 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S9029).

  Further, the CPU 9056 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, the payout control micro that is mounted on the payout control board 9037 in response to winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 9056 relates to the solenoid on / off in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. Is output to the output port (step S9031: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S9032).

  Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S9033). For example, when the start flag for normal symbol fluctuation is set, the CPU 9056 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the normal symbol fluctuation speed every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes a normal symbol effect display on the normal symbol display device 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed in the main process. It may be executed.

  When the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909 are shifted and stopped, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) when the variable display result is a loss symbol.

  If the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the effect display device 909 are shifted and stopped, the variable display state of the effect symbol is changed after the effect symbol variable display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 909L, 909C, and 909R on the effect display device 909, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed (however, in the case of sudden probability big hit) May not reach and suddenly a probable big hit symbol (for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b, the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 909. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 909 corresponding to the stoppage display of “5” as the small hit symbol on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short. It is a big hit, and it is a big hit that shifts the gaming state after the big hit game to a probable state (that is, it makes it appear to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) is there). That is, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big winning opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Note that when the gaming machine is configured such that the big hit types are all probable big hits, the small hits may not be provided. In addition, when all big hit types are probabilistic big hits, if you make a small hit, it will only shift to the probable change state (high probability state) and suddenly probable big hits without the short time state (high base state). Is preferably provided.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1'-1 to non-reach are shown as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "non-reach". A variation pattern of reach PA1′-4 is prepared. In addition, normal PA2'-1 to normal PA2'-2, normal PB2'-1 to normal PB2'-1 to normal are shown as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of" and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is "reach". Variation patterns of PB2'-2, super PA3'-1 to super PA3'-2, super PB3'-1 to super PB3'-2 are prepared. As shown in FIG. 54, the change pattern of the non-reach PA 1'-4 that is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect is re-changed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-continuous, when normal PB2'-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2'-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, among the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when using the super PA 3'-1 to super PA 3'-2, the re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 54, in this embodiment, normal PA2'-3 to normal PA2'-4, normal PA2'-4, and normal PA2'-4 are used as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. PB2'-3 to normal PB2'-4, super PA3'-3 to super PA3'-4, super PB3'-3 to super PB3'-4, special PG1'-1 to special PG1'-3, special PG2 ' Variation patterns of −1 to special PG2′-2 are prepared. In FIG. 54, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1′-1 to special PG1′-3 and special PG2′-1 to special PG2′-2 are fluctuation patterns that are used when suddenly a big hit or a small hit. is there. Also, as shown in FIG. 54, when normal PB2'-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when sudden probability change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2'-4 is used, re-fluctuation is performed twice. Further, among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when using the super PA 3'-3 to the super PA 3'-4, the re-variation is performed three times. Further, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1'-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, in the case of Super Reach A with a pseudo-ream, the variation time is 32. In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach, Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1 ′): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2 ′): Determines the type (type) of the variation pattern (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3 ′): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4 '): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5 ′): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then determined by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). The variation pattern included in the type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to presence / absence of effects such as pseudo-ream and slip effects.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, normal CA3'-1, which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with only normal reach, and fluctuation with normal reach and pseudo-ream It is classified into a normal CA3′-2 that is a variation pattern type including a pattern and a super CA3′-3 that is a variation pattern type with super reach. In the case of suddenly probable big hit, the type is classified into special CA4′-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4′-2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. It is divided. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4'-1, which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of deviation, non-reach CA2'-1 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream, or sliding effect, and a variation pattern that does not involve reach but involves pseudo-ream or slip effect. Non-reach CA2'-2, which is a variation pattern type that includes, and non-reach CA2'-3, which is a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern of shortened variation that does not involve reach, pseudo-ream, or slip production, and variation that involves only normal reach Normal CA2′-4, which is a variation pattern type including a pattern, Normal CA2′-5, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving two sequences of normal reach and re-variation, and one simulation of normal reach and one re-variation Normal CA2'-6, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with ream, and a variation with super reach Are the type divided into a super CA2'-7 is a turn type.

  In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 53, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number of (1) and the random number for determination of normal symbol of (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 90560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 90560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 56A is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 56 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 56 (A) is set in the probability variation big hit determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 56 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

  56 (B) and 56 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 56 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) is set in FIG. 56 (C). Each numerical value listed is set. Also, the numerical values described in FIGS. 56B and 56C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 56 (C) may not be provided. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 9053 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 56 (A). If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit, and a sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 56B and 56C, it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 56 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. In addition, “probability” shown in FIGS. 56B and 56C indicates the probability (ratio) of making a small hit. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56B and 56C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a start winning is made at the first start winning opening 9013 and the change display of the first special symbol is executed, the start winning is made at the second start winning opening 9014 and the second special symbol is changed. Compared to the case where the display is executed, the ratio determined as “small hit” is high.

  56D and 56E are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. Among these, FIG. 56 (D) determines the jackpot type using the holding memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. FIG. 56 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Jackpot type determination table (for second special symbol) 90131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b indicate that when the variable display result is determined to be a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is set to “normal jackpot”, “ This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit” and “sudden probability big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56D and 56E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 90131a (40 minutes) On the other hand, in the jackpot type determination table 90131b, two determination values are assigned to the “sudden probability variation jackpot” (at a ratio of 2/40). (Suddenly a probable big hit) Therefore, in this embodiment, when a start winning is made at the first start winning opening 9013 and the change display of the first special symbol is executed, the start winning is made at the second start winning opening 9014 and the second special symbol is changed. Compared to the case where the display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “suddenly probable big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 90131a, and “suddenly probable big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 90131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (D) and 56 (E), the sudden probability variation big hit (two round big hit) as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, and the gaming value There are cases where it is determined as a normal big hit and a probable big hit (15 round big hit) as the second specific gaming state that gives a larger amount of game value, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed Although the case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 (D) and 56 (E), the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. In this example, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types of 15 rounds and two rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the one shown in this example. Not limited to. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are three types of big hit types, “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, and “sudden probability big hit”. A type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  The “ordinary big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to the 15-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the short-time state (high base state) after the big hit gaming state ends (see steps S90167 and 90168 described later). Then, after shifting to the time reduction state, the time reduction state is ended when the variable display is ended 100 times (see steps S90168 and S90137 to 90140 described later). Note that, in this embodiment, the time reduction state also ends when a big hit occurs after the transition to the time reduction state and before the execution of the 100 fluctuation displays is ended (see step S90132 described later).

  The “probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of the big hit gaming state and is shifted to the probable change state (high probability state) after the big hit gaming state is finished (in this example, the time is changed to the probable change state and the time is shortened). The process is also shifted to the state (high base state) (see steps S90169 and S90170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

  In addition, “suddenly promising big hit” is allowed up to a small number of times the big winning opening is opened compared to “normal big hit” or “probable big hit” (in this example, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, in “normal big hit” and “probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is long. It is extremely short, 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big winning opening during a big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probable big hit gaming state, the state is shifted to the probability change state (high probability state) (in this embodiment, the state is shifted to the probability change state and also to the short time state (high base state). (See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the probability variation state is maintained until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132 described later).

  In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, even when “small hit” is reached, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each time, similarly to the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Is controlled. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The big hit type determination tables 90131a and 90131b are numerical values that are compared with a random value of 1, and correspond to the “normal big hit”, “probable big hit”, and “suddenly probable big hit” (big hit type judgment values). ) Is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value.

  FIGS. 57A to 57C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C indicate, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, according to the determination result of the jackpot type, the variation pattern type is changed to a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random pattern random number (random 2) values for determination of the variation pattern, and normal CA3′-1 to normal CA3′−. 2, a determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3′-3, special CA4′-1, and special CA4′-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 90132A shown in FIG. 57A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit” and FIG. 57B used when the big hit type is “probable big hit”. The allocation pattern of the determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA3′-1 to normal CA3′-2 and super CA3′-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 90132B shown in FIG.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 90132A to 90132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probable big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 150-251, it turns out that the variable display with a super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed at least.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of super PA3'-3 and super PA3'-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (super PB3'- 3, variation pattern type including variation pattern of super PB 3'-4). In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 90132A for normal big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 90132B for probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream, super reach and pseudo ream A variation pattern type that is not accompanied is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 90132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, the big hit types such as special CA4′-1 and special CA4′-2 are other than “suddenly probable big hit”. In some cases, a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, it is different from the normal big hit or the big hit state with the probable big hit. The variation pattern type can be determined.

  FIG. 57D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4′-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 58A to 58C are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135C. Among these, FIG. 58 (A) shows the variation pattern type determination table 90135A for loss used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3. FIG. 58 (B) shows a variation pattern type determination table 90135B for loss that is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 58 (C) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 90135C that is used when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a short time state. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135C have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an outlier symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 58, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 90135B to 90135C are used for a case where the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state and a case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common variation pattern type determination table may be used for the case of the probability variation state or the time-short state and the case where the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 58C, a case is used in which the variation pattern type determination table 90135C for deviation / time shortening is used in common regardless of the total number of pending storages. As the variation pattern type determination table, a plurality of loss variation pattern determination tables (tables having different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 90135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. Although the case where two types of tables are used, that is, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 90135B to be used, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages. A plurality of may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 90135A to 90135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for determination of the variation pattern type, and includes non-reach CA2'-1 to non-reach CA2. Determination values corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of “−3, normal CA2′−4 to normal CA2′-6 and super CA2′-7 are set.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 230-251, it turns out that the variable display accompanied by at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is performed irrespective of the total number of reserved storage.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is If it is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo-ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of pending storage. With such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 90135A, 90135B) is at least one of variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) The determination values (1 to 79 in the example shown in FIGS. 58A and 58B) are assigned. Note that “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means that, for example, the variable display result is a big hit without the reach, the pseudo-ream, the slide effect, etc. This is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when not.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state. However, it is normal that the current gaming state is a probable variation state. Depending on whether it is a state, a big hit variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern of shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 58B. However, the total number of pending storages (the first number of pending storages or the number of second pending storages may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state is shown. The threshold value may be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 or 1), the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the shortening variation pattern type determination table. It may be determined.

  FIGS. 59A and 59B are explanatory diagrams showing hit variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each hit variation pattern determination table 90137A to 90137B is selected as a use table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 90137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3′-1 to normal CA3′-2 and super CA3′-3. The hit variation pattern determination table 90137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that the type is either special CA4′-1 or special CA4′-2. Each of the variation pattern determination tables 90137A to 90137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of a random number (random 3) for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 59A, as the variation pattern type, normal CA3′-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and a pseudo-ream. Are classified into normal CA3′-2 which is a super CA3′-2 and a super CA3′-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). ing. In the example shown in FIG. 59B, as the variation pattern types, special CA4′-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are included. The case where it is classified into '-2' is shown. In FIG. 59B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of an effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of depending on the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4′-1 includes a special PG 1′-1 and a special PG 2′-1 which are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a pseudo ream and a sliding effect, and the special CA 4′-2 You may comprise so that special PG1'-2, special PG1'-3, and special PG2'-2 with a slide effect may be included.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A stored in the ROM 9054. The deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A is based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “out of range”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  61 and 62 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of an effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 54, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls the effect display device 909 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), so the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are displayed as “display result designation commands”. That's it.

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 90100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 90560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start 1 designation command, a big hit start 2 designation command, or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of “ordinary big hit”, the big hit start 1 designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and in the case of “normal big hit”, the big hit start 2 designation command (A002 (H)) is used. In the case of “sudden probability change big hit” or “small hit”, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (A003 (H)) is used. Note that the game control microcomputer 90560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a special winning opening) indicating a display of the number of times (round) indicated by XX while the special winning opening is open. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end 1 designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game by “normal big hit” is ended. Command A 302 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, specifying the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end 2 designation command: an ending 2 designation command). The jackpot end 2 designation command (A302 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by the “probable big hit”. Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden odd variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is the time reduction state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is in the probability change state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

  In this embodiment, as the hold memory information, an effect control command (first hold memory number addition designation command) indicating that the hold memory number has increased or decreased for the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number, respectively. , The second reserved memory number addition designation command) is transmitted. However, the form of the reserved memory information is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the reserved memory information in the following mode is used. You may make it transmit.

(1) Only one command is transmitted as the reserved storage information, and in the one command, which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is increased is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories is increased (The first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the hold storage information, and in the one command, which of the first hold storage and the second hold storage is increased is specified, and the total number of the hold storage is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) Designate which one of the first start winning prize port 9013 and the second start winning prize opening 9014 has won the start-up as the hold storage information (which one of the first hold memory and the second hold memory has increased). In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The total pending storage number may be set as EXT data for transmission.

(4) Designating which of the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014 the start winning prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated as the hold memory information In addition to transmitting the production control command (first start winning designation command, second start winning designation command), a reserved memory number designation command for designating the reserved memory number is transmitted separately. The increased reserved memory number (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set and transmitted as EXT data.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 70), the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit, It is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating a big hit or a small hit or a value for designating a big hit type is set, and control for transmission to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, Based on the category command, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes a predetermined determination value, the variation pattern type can be recognized.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 63, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, if it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 1 designation command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “probability big hit”, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, if it is determined that “suddenly promising big hit”, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “small hit” is obtained, the CPU 9056 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  FIG. 64 and FIG. 65 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 64 and FIG. 65, in this embodiment, which gaming state is being used, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or production symbol, and the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data in accordance with whether it is determined that the value falls within any determination value range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2′-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2′-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 89, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 170 to 199, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the variation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of super CA2′-7 is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 90100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2′-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used for determining which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and (B). This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This also applies to the subsequent fluctuation categories 9 to 10 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. A threshold that is used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the range of the determined determination value.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state and out of place at the time of winning the start, in step S90232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first sets the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type to 1. It is determined whether or not 219. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 9056 performs variation with “08 (H)” set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “09 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Note that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2'-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the short time state. In this way, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2'-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S90232 of the effect process at the time of winning, which will be described later, if it is off, common determination processing may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S90226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “usual big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of the effect processing at the time of winning to be described later, the CPU 9056 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74. Determine whether. When the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3′-1), the CPU 9056 performs variation with “10 (H)” set in the EXT data. A category 21 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3′-2). The changed category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “12 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 150 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3′-3). The changed category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “probable big hit” is made at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3′-1), the CPU 9056 performs the variation in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 24 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “14 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3′-2). The changed category 25 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 9056 sets “15 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3′-3). The changed category 26 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big hit at the time of starting winning, in step S90232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA4′-1), the CPU 9056 has the variation in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 27 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA4′-2), the CPU 9056 is a variation in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 28 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 9056 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7 and super CA3′-3 variation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore (see FIGS. 57 and 58), there is no inconsistency between the determination result at the time of winning and the variation pattern type of variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7, or super CA3′-3, the display change effect described later is executed only for the variation display determined at the time of winning. May be. In such a configuration, only when it is determined that the variation pattern types are non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7, and super CA3′-3, the variation category command ( Specifically, a variation category 1 command, a variation category 8 command, a variation category 23 command, and a variation category 26 command are transmitted), and in the case of a winning determination result for other variation pattern types, a variation category command is transmitted. You may make it not. In addition, when it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7 and super CA3′-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified is transmitted. It may be.

  Note that the hold notice effect is a kind of so-called prefetch notice effect that is executed before the start of the fluctuating display that is the subject of the notice effect, and the first hold memory display unit 909a and the second hold memory display unit. This is a notice effect performed by displaying the hold display in 909b in a display mode different from the normal display mode. The hold notice effect is executed, for example, at the timing at which the appearance effect or hold display is displayed based on the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display to be noticed. In addition, based on the occurrence of the start winning for the variable display that is subject to the advance notice, the display of the hold display is once started in the normal display mode at the timing when the appearance effect or the hold display is displayed, and then a predetermined timing (for example, On hold shift timing), the hold notice effect may be executed by changing the hold display to a display mode different from the normal display mode.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 occurs in the short time state (high base state), or the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 occurs during the big hit game. Except for the case (see steps S901215A and S901216A), the winning determination process is executed each time a start winning is generated, the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 63 is transmitted, and the variation category shown in FIGS. A command is sent. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 90100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute the hold notice effect to give notice

  The effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the effect display device 909 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 61 and 62, the display state of the lamp is changed, or the sound number data is output to the audio output board 9070. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 designates a variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

  In this embodiment, the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the production control command, production control command data is output from the main board 9031 to the production control board 9080 via the relay board 9077 one byte at a time with eight parallel signal lines of the production control signals CD0 to CD7. In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the effect control board 9080 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data take-in process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) and second special display of the design symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a. An effect display that can be used in common with the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 908b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When controlling the production components such as the device 909, the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 to the production control microcomputer 90100 can be prevented from increasing.

  66 and 67 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (step S9026) program executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, if the first start port switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning port 9013 is turned on, that is, the start to the first start winning port 9013 is performed. If a winning has occurred, a first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S90311 and S90312). If the second start port switch 9014a for detecting that a game ball has won the second start winning port 9014 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 9014 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a is not turned on, any one of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

  Processing in steps S90300 to S90310 is as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the microcomputer for game control 90560 is in a state where variable display of special symbols can be started, it confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) is defined as the variation display variation time of the special symbol Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command according to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S90302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S90303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S90303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 90100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S90304. The effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S90304): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S90305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. Is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 78), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control processing in step S9022 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

  Preliminary winning opening process (step S90305): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control for transmitting a special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by a timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S90306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening open process (step S9006): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to transmit a designation command after opening the jackpot to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S90307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause display control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S90308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release process (step S90309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S90308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S90310.

  Small hit end process (step S90310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 90100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S90300.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing processing in steps S90312 and S90314. Among these, FIG. 68 (A) is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of step S90312. FIG. 68B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process in step S90314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 9013a is in the on state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of one reserved memory is 4 is confirmed (step S90111A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S901212A) and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S901213A). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 69) (step S901214A). . In the process of step S901214A, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to holding storage. As shown in FIG. 69, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation pattern. A random number for type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

  In this embodiment, the random number value such as the big hit determination random number is stored as the reserved storage in the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer. However, the predetermined information stored as the reserved storage is random. Not limited to numbers. For example, it may be determined in advance whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit based on a big hit determination random number or the like, and the determination result may be stored as a hold storage in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. .

  Next, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not a time reduction flag indicating that the gaming state is a time reduction state (high base state) is set (step S901215A). If set, the process proceeds to step S90120A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S901216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if it is a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state), the CPU 9056 directly proceeds to step S901220A.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, a prize presentation effect process is executed in which a fluctuation display result and a fluctuation pattern type when a fluctuation based on the detected start prize is subsequently executed are preliminarily determined at the start prize (step). S901217A). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect effect process (step S901218A), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219A). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220A).

  By executing the processing of steps S901218A and S901219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always receives the symbol designation command every time the first starting winning opening 9013 is won and the winning effect processing of step S901217A is executed. And the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 90100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218A to S901220A is executed, a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 occurs, and the effect designating process at step S901217A is executed, the symbol designation command , A variable category command, and a first pending storage number addition designation command are sent together in one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect processing in step S901217A is not executed because it is determined as Y in step S901215A or step S901216A, the CPU 9056 transmits only the first reserved memory number addition designation command in step S901220A. The control for transmitting the winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variation category command) is not performed. In addition, when the winning effect processing in step S901217A is not executed, a winning determination result designation in which a value (for example, “FF (H)”) indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is set as EXT data is designated. A command (design designation command, variation category command) may be transmitted.

  Also, in this embodiment, when the process of step S901215A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013, the winning of step S901217A is performed only when the gaming state is the low base state. A time effect process is executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of step S901216A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013, only in the case of not being a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, the step S901217A Winning effect processing is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to step S901217A only when the game state is a big hit game state, and the game process may be executed at step S901217A when the game state is a small hit game state.

  Further, in this embodiment, the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is controlled to open the big winning opening over a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the big hit is started. This is a state from when the final winning opening of the final round is finished until it is notified that the big hit is finished. Specifically, it is a state in which the processes from the big winning opening opening pre-process (see step S90305) to the big hit end process (see step S90307) in the special symbol process are being executed.

  Next, the second start port switch passage process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 9014a is in the on state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved port switch 9014a is turned on). Whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the stored number is 4 is confirmed (step S90111B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S90112B), and the value of the aggregate reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S901213B). Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 9053 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 69) (step S901214B). . Note that in the process of step S901214B, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 9056 executes a winning presentation process (step S901217B). Then, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S1218B), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Control is performed (step S901219B). Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901220B).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S901218B and S901219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 9056 always starts the winning at the second start winning opening 9014 and executes the winning effect processing of step S901217B, so that the symbol designation command is always executed. And the variation category command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 90100.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S901218B to S901220B is executed, the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014 occurs and the effect designating process at the time of winning in step S901217B is executed. , A variable category command, and a second reserved memory number addition designation command are sent together in one timer interrupt.

  Also in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as step S901215A may be performed, and if the time is short, the winning effect process of step S901217B may not be executed. That is, only in the normal state (low base state), the winning effect effect processing in step S901217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designation command and the variation category command.

  Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the same process as in step S901216A may be performed, and the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be executed if a big hit game is being played. Also, in the second start port switch passing process, the winning effect process in step S901217B may not be executed (that is, the winning determination process may not be executed for the second special symbol). .

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S901217A and S901217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 9056 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. 56 (A). It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S90220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the big hit type or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing Apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 9013 and the second start winning opening 9014, before the display of the variation based on the start winning starts, By executing the time effect process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small hit is made, and in which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number falls. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. In 90100, a display change effect is executed to notify that a big hit or super reach will be reached during the change display of the effect symbol.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in step S90220), the CPU 9056 sets a probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S90221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 9056 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. Are matched (step S90222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays may be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S90221 at the time of starting winning, until actually starting the displaying of variation based on the starting winning. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in a probable change state at the start winning prize until the display of fluctuation based on the start winning is actually started. If there is a probability variation big hit or sudden probability variation big hit before, the normal state has changed to the probability variation state.) For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S9021 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S9061 described later) are not necessarily the same. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 9056 displays the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B as shown in FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination value, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S90223). In this case, the CPU 9056, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 9013 (when the winning effect processing in step S901217A is executed), the small hit determination table (first first) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 9014 (when the winning effect processing at step S901217B is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 56 (C). It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S90223), the CPU 9056 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S90224).

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S90225). In this embodiment, the CPU 9056 determines in step S90225 whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state and whether or not it is a time reduction state (specifically, whether or not a probability variation flag or a time reduction flag is set). judge. It should be noted that there are a plurality of times during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the engine is in a promiscuous state and the short-time state at the time of starting winning until the start of the variable display based on the starting winning. Variable display may be performed. Therefore, at the time of starting winning, the game state changes after confirming whether or not it is in the probable change state and whether or not it is in the short time state in step S90225 until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started. (For example, when a probable big hit or a sudden probable big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state may change to a probable state). Therefore, the gaming state determined at step S90225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S9061 described later) are not necessarily the same. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold value for detachment according to the determination result of step S90225 (step S90226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination is incorporated in advance. By determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls within. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data to be set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 219 in step S90232 described later. Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 219 (that is, if it is 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64).

  For example, if the CPU 9056 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S90232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64). If the threshold is 214 or less (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64). If the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 64).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. Further, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined as 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. , 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without performing the determination of the gaming state in step S90225. Even in such a configuration, since the range of determination values is shared with respect to at least the variation pattern type that becomes “super-reaching”, it is determined whether or not “super-reaching” is detected. be able to.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S90223), the CPU 9056 uses the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designation command. Is set (step S90227).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a threshold for small hits (step S90228). In this embodiment, the CPU 9056 sets the threshold value 251, and in step S <b> 9022, which will be described later, determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251), It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 65). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step S90220 or step S90222, the CPU 9056 determines the big hit type based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B. Is determined (step S90229). In this case, when there is a start winning in the first start winning opening 9013 (when the winning effect processing in step S901217A is executed), the CPU 9056 receives a big hit type determination table (first) shown in FIG. Using special symbol 90131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”. If there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 9014 (when the winning effect processing at step S901217B is executed), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 56 (E). 90131b is used to determine whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S90230). In this case, when it is determined that the “normal big hit” is reached, the CPU 9056 performs a process of setting the EXT data “01 (H)” indicating the “normal big hit” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “probability big hit” is determined, the CPU 9056 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “probability big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit” is determined, the CPU 9056 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” to the symbol designation command.

  Then, the CPU 9056 sets each threshold value for jackpot according to the jackpot type determined in step S90229 (step S90231).

  For example, the CPU 9056 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when it is determined as “normal big hit”. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 74 in step S9022, which will be described later. Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 65). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 65). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (that is, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 65).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 9056 determines “probability big hit”, the thresholds 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 in step S90232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 65). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 65). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 65).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 9056 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S9022, which will be described later. Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 65). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 65).

  Next, the CPU 9056 uses the threshold value set in steps S90226, S90228, and S90231 and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in steps S901214A and S901214B to determine which value of the variation pattern type determination random number is. It is determined whether it falls within the determination value range (step S90232).

  In steps S90226, S90228, and S90231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 57 and 58) is set, and in step S90232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 9056 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S90233). Specifically, the CPU 9056 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65 according to which variation pattern type is determined in step S90232. A process of setting any value of (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this example, the case where it is determined whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly within the range even if it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the winning determination, When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 90100 is not specifically shown as to which variation pattern type, the variation shown to be one of the big hit variation pattern types. A display change effect, which will be described later, may be executed based on the reception of the category command.

  71 and 72 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S9051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 90100 (step S9051A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 9056 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 9056 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the second pending storage number is 0 (step S9052). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 9056 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Data indicating “second” is set in (Step S9053). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 9066 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

  In this example, the processing of steps S9052 to S9054 is executed, whereby the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, control is performed so that the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is established in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the case where the second special symbol variation display is preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, the value of the random number for determining the big hit (random R) in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. May be executed only for comparison with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state, and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the probability variation state (high probability state) (specifically, the processing of step S90220) Only step S90221 and step S90222 may be omitted). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 stores in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 9055. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 9056 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S9058). Note that the CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

  In addition, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current gaming state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a probability variation state background designation command when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a time-short state background designation command when only the time-short flag indicating the time-short state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. Further, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command if neither the probability change flag nor the time reduction flag is set.

  Specifically, when the CPU 9056 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is sent. Set to pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In this example, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation) is set for each timer interrupt. Command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) in order of transmission to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A pending storage number subtraction designation command (a first pending storage number subtraction designation command or a second pending storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 90100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 9013, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 9014 Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S90300 to S90310 can be made common between the case where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area, and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for jackpot determination that is extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passing process or step S901214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. A random number is read and a big hit judgment is performed. The big hit determination module compares a big hit determination value or a small hit determination value (see FIG. 56) determined in advance with a big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The big hit determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is in a probable change state, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the case where the gaming state is in a non-probable change state (normal state). Specifically, a probability change jackpot determination table (a table in which the value on the right side of FIG. 56A in the ROM 9054 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. There is provided a normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 56A in the ROM 9054 are set) set to be smaller than the hour big hit determination table. Then, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 9056 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation big hit determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for random determination (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 56A, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be “probability big hit” or “sudden probability big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 56B and 56C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 56B and 56C, the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 56 (C). . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S9062), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S9075.

  In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S9072). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 selects the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 56 (D). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 selects the big special hit type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 56 (E).

  Next, the CPU 9056 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "Suddenly probable big hit") is determined as the big hit type (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type that is extracted in step S901214A of the first starter switch passing process and step S901214B of the second starter switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. The random number is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 56D and 56E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 9056 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S9074). For example, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 9056 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “normal big hit” is decided, “3” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. If “probable big hit” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the jackpot type is first determined, and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown. It is not limited to what was shown in the example. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on a random number for determining the big hit type. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S90301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S9091). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 serves as a big hit variation pattern type determination table 90132A to 90132C (FIG. ) To (C)) is selected (step S9092). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S9093). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 uses a small hit variation pattern type determination table 90132D (FIG. 57 (D) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. )) Is selected (step S9094). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the short time flag indicating that the short time state is set (step S9095). In this example, the time-short flag is set when shifting to the time-saving state at the end of the big hit game based on the normal big hit, and the time-shifting state is also set at the end of the big hit game based on the probability variable big hit. Is also transferred, the time-short flag is set. Therefore, if it is determined as Y in step S9095, control is performed in the short-time state together with the probabilistic change state after the big hit game based on the probabilistic big hit in addition to the case where only the short-time state is controlled after the big hit game based on the normal big win. There are times when it has been.

  If the time flag is not set (N in step S9095), that is, if the gaming state is a normal state, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S9096). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S9096), the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern type determination table 90135A for detachment as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types (see FIG. 58A) is selected (step S9097). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S9096), the CPU 9056 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 90135B (see FIG. 58B) is selected (step S9098). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  If the time reduction flag is set (Y in step S9095), that is, if the gaming state is a probability change state or a time reduction state, the CPU 9056 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As the table to be used, the variation pattern type determination table 90135C for detachment (see FIG. 58C) is selected (step S9099). Then, control goes to a step S90100.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S9095 to S9099 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for loss shown in FIG. The type determination table 90135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability variation state or a time-short state, the variation pattern type determination table 90135C for failure shown in FIG. 58 (C) is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2′-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S90100, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2′-3 is determined, the process of step S90102 Thus, the non-reach PA1′-2 of the shortening variation is determined as the variation pattern (see FIG. 60). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 58C) used in the probability variation state and the short time state, and a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage (FIG. 58). (B) is a different table, but a common table may be used as a variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a probability change state or a short time state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1). The fluctuation display of the shortening fluctuation may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 9056 determines Y in step S9095, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The determination table 90135A (see FIG. 58A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 9056 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer) and selects it in the process of step S9092, S9094, S9097, S9098, or S9099. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90100).

  Next, the CPU 9056 is a hit variation pattern determination table 90137A, 90137B (see FIG. 59) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S90100. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 90138A (see FIG. 60) is selected (step S90101). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S90101. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S90102). In the case where the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 9056 has a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. In addition, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90104).

  Next, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 9055 (step S90105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S90106).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S9095 to S90100 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2′-1 to non-reach CA2′-3 shown in FIG. 58) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach ( 58 including normal CA2'-4 to normal CA2'-6 and super CA2'-7 variation pattern types) shown in FIG. 58, and determining any one of the variation pattern types based on the reach determination result. A table may be selected to determine the variation pattern type.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, the CPU 9056 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether or not “super reach out” or “non-reach out” in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In consideration of a decrease in the execution rate of the notice effect, as shown in this embodiment, the lottery process using the reach determination random number is not performed, and “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type. It is preferable to configure so as to perform a hold notice effect by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 9056 transmits any effect control command (see FIG. 61) of one of the display results 1 to 5 of the display results 5 according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 9056 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S90116. When the big hit flag is set, when the big hit type is “normal big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S90111 and S90112). Whether or not it is “ordinary big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. . Further, when the big hit type is “probable big hit”, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S90113 and S90114). Whether or not it is “probable big hit” can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. . When neither the “normal big hit” nor the “probable big hit” (that is, “sudden probability big hit”), the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (step S90115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (step S90110: N), the CPU 9056 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step S90116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (step S90117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90116), that is, in the case of a loss, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (step S90118).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S90303) (step S90119).

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 9056 first checks whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command (the first pending storage number subtraction designation command or the second pending storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S90121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted, for example, indicates whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S90112 described later. The stored number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag may be set, and in step S901121, it may be confirmed whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is set. Also, in this case, the set reserved memory number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol fluctuation display is terminated or when the big jackpot is terminated. That's fine.

  If the pending storage count subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit the pending storage count subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901122). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a first reserved memory number subtraction designation command. If a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a second reserved memory number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S901125). When the variation time timer times out (step S901126), the CPU 9056 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing (step S90304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S90131). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 9056, if it is set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time shortening flag indicating the time reduction state, and the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state. Is reset (step S90132), and control for transmitting a big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 is performed (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “normal jackpot”, a jackpot start 1 designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is “probable big hit”, a jackpot start 2 designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit” or “suddenly probable big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the big hit type buffer) Based on the determination.

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (a time for which the effect display device 909 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step S90134). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, “15 times in the case of“ normal big hit ”or“ probable big hit ”, 2 times in the case of“ suddenly promising big hit ”) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S90135). . The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of normal big hit or probability change big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S90305) (step S90136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S90131, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the hourly number counter that indicates the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the hourly state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by −1 (step S90138). When the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the time reduction flag (step S90140).

  Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time for which the effect display device 909 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S90143). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S90144). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S90308) (step S90145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90146).

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process. In the big hit end process, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S90160). If the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S90164. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S90161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S90162). Here, when it is “normal jackpot”, a jackpot end 1 designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and when it is “probable big hit”, jackpot end 2 designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. ) Is transmitted, and in the case of “sudden probability sudden change big hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) is sent. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S90164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the jackpot game to be ended this time is based on the normal jackpot (step S90166). Whether or not the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended is specifically determined whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. This can be determined by checking. If the big hit game based on the normal big hit is to be ended (Y in step S90166), the CPU 9056 sets the short time flag to shift the gaming state to the short time state (step S90167). In addition, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) to the time reduction number counter (step S90168).

  Unless it is a case where the big hit game based on the normal big hit is not finished (that is, when the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit or the sudden probability variation big hit is finished), the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to change the gaming state to the probability changed state. While shifting (step S90169), the time reduction flag is set and the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (step S90170).

  Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S90300) (step S90171).

  In this embodiment, by executing the above processing, when controlled to a probable variation state, it is also controlled to a short time state, so that the gaming state is a normal state (low probability / low base state) , There will be three states: a short-time state (low probability / high base state) and a probabilistic state (high probability / high base state).

  FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol display control process (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol displays 908a and 908b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 9056 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal process. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S9022) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b. Since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S903204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is not displayed in the display control processing of step S9022. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S903201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 90560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 90100 side, the display result designation command transmission processing also varies. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the case where the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag is shown. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set when the variation of the special symbol starts. At the same time, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S9032), the CPU 9056 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, an effect control CPU 90101) as effect control means mounted on an effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initial setting of a timer for determining the start interval (eg, 4 ms) of effect control (step S90701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs effect control process processing (step S90705). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 909 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S90706). In the 4th symbol process, in the 4th symbol display areas 909c and 909d of the effect display device 909, a process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S90707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S90702.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing effect control commands received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 61 and 62) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  81 to 83 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

  If the received presentation control command is a display result designation command (step S90617), the presentation control CPU 90101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. In the display result designation command storage area (step S90618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (step S90620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (commands A001 to A002 (H)) (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S90622). In this case, for example, if the jackpot start 1 designation command is received, the jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag is set. If the jackpot start 2 designation command is received, the jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A003 (H)) (step S90623), the production control CPU 90101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S90624).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (commands A301 to A302 (H)) (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S90626). In this case, for example, when a jackpot end 1 designation command is received, the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag is set. When a jackpot end 2 designation command is received, the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag is set. set.

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A303 (H)) (step S90627), the production control CPU 90101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag. (Step S90628).

  If the received effect control command is one of the symbol designation commands (step S90651), the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received symbol designation command in the symbol designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90651). S90652).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S90653), the effect control CPU 90101 temporarily stores the received variation category command in the variation category command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90653). S90654).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number addition designation command (step S90655), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S90656). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 receives the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received first reserved memory number addition designation command. Then, the first start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in a vacant first storage area (step S90657).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step S90658), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area formed in the RAM. The value is incremented by 1 (step S90659). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 receives the symbol designation command temporarily stored in the symbol designation command, the variation category command temporarily stored in the variation category command storage area, and the received second reserved storage number addition designation command. Then, the second start winning prize command storage area formed in the RAM is stored in an empty first storage area (step S90660).

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the start winning prize. Of these, FIG. 84 (A) shows a specific example of the first start winning command storage area, and FIG. 84 (B) shows a specific example of the second start winning command storage area. As shown in FIG. 84 (A), an area (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the first reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the first start winning command storage area. Yes. Further, in the second start winning command storage area, areas (storage areas 1 to 4) corresponding to the maximum value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) are secured. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S901218A to S901220A of the first start port switch passing process and steps S901218B to S901220B of the second start port switch passing process of FIG. When there is a start winning to the mouth 9014, within one timer interruption, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number addition designation command (first reserved memory number addition designation command or second reserved memory number addition) Three commands (designated command) are transmitted as a set. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84, in each of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the first start winning command storage area and the second start winning command storage area, a symbol designating command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count addition designation A storage area is secured so that commands can be stored in association with each other.

  In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved storage number addition designation command within one timer interrupt. Therefore, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the symbol designation command in the command analysis process. When the variable category command is received, it is temporarily stored in the symbol designating command storage area and the variable category command storage area, respectively. When the pending storage number addition designation command is received, if the first pending storage number addition designation command is received, it is understood that the first pending storage number is incremented by one. If the first reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the first stored memory number addition designation command is received together with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and the variable category command. When the first reserved memory number addition designation command is stored in the first start winning command storage area and the second reserved memory number addition designation command is received, the second reserved memory is stored together with the temporarily stored symbol designation command and variable category command. The number addition designation command is stored in the second start prize command storage area (in FIG. 84, the first start prize command is stored). An example is shown in which commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 4 of the pay area, and commands are stored only in the storage area 1 of the storage areas 1 to 4 of the second start winning command storage area. Have been).

  Note that each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 84 is sequentially displayed in steps S90664 and S90668, which will be described later, at the timing when the variation display of the effect symbol is started each time the variation display of the effect symbol is started. Deleted. In this case, in this embodiment, since the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 of the second start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 84 (B) are deleted. Next, if the second reserved memory does not newly occur, only the first reserved memory is stored. Therefore, the first timing shown in FIG. The contents stored in the first storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area are deleted, and the contents of the first starting winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 84 (A), when the variable display of a new effect symbol is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is deleted. The command is shifted to the storage area 1, each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2, and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3.

  Further, in this embodiment, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the reserved memory number addition designation command received when the start prize is generated are also referred to as a start prize command when they are comprehensively expressed. In addition, among the commands at the time of starting winning a prize, a reserved memory number addition designation command which is a command for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased is comprehensively expressed. In some cases, it is also referred to as reserved storage information. Further, a symbol designation command which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or the small hit is determined in the winning effect process at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 70), the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  In this embodiment, in step S906002, which will be described later, a display change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display (that is, the hold display or the active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the received command at the time of starting winning is received. Decide whether to execute. If it is determined to be executed, in step S906007, final display mode designation data indicating the display mode after change is set in association with the command at the time of starting winning. The start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 84 is provided with an area for storing final display mode designation data corresponding to each start winning command. When the value is 0, the final display mode designation data indicates that the display change effect is not executed (including the case where the display change effect is already executed). When the display mode is the first special mode (blue) and the value is 2, the display mode after the change is the second special mode (green). When the value is 3, The display mode after the change is the third special mode (red pattern). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 84, the display mode after the change is the second special mode (green) in association with the command at the time of starting winning stored in the storage area 4 of the first starting winning command storing area. The final display mode designating data indicating this is stored.

  In this embodiment, when the display change effect is executed, the timing for executing the display change effect is determined in step S906004 described later based on the received start winning command. Based on the determination result, display change timing designation data indicating the timing for executing the display change effect is set in association with the command at the time of starting winning. In the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 84, an area for storing display change timing designation data corresponding to each start winning command is provided. When the value is 0, the display change timing designation data indicates that the display change effect is not executed (including the case where the display change effect is already executed). When the value is 2, it indicates the second timing (at the start of target variation), and when the value is 3, the third timing (the target reach super-reach) Middle). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 84, the timing at which the display change effect is executed in association with the command at the time of start winning stored in the storage area 4 of the first start winning command storage area is that the third timing. The display change timing designation data shown is stored. Details of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing will be described later.

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S90661), the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number storage area ( Step S90662). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 erases one first hold display in the first hold storage display unit 909a, shifts the remaining first hold display after the deleted first hold storage one by one, The first reserved memory number display in the one reserved memory display unit 909a is updated (step S90663). For example, if the first to third first hold indications of the first hold storage display unit 909a are lit up, and if the first hold storage number subtraction designation command is received, the first While erasing the first hold display, the first hold display displayed in the second is shifted to the first display area, and the first hold display displayed in the third is displayed in the second display area. Shift to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 receives a start winning command (design designation command, variable category command, first reserved memory number addition designation command) stored in the first storage area of the first start winning command storage area. The final display mode designation data and the display change timing designation data) are deleted, and the contents of the first start winning prize command storage area are shifted (step S90664).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step S90665), the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number storage area ( Step S90666). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 erases one second on-hold display in the second on-hold storage display unit 909b, shifts the remaining second on-hold display after the erased second on-hold storage one by one, The second reserved memory number display in the two reserved memory display unit 909b is updated (step S90667). For example, when the first to third second hold displays of the second hold storage display unit 909b are lit up, the first hold storage number subtraction designation command is received and the first second hold display is received. While erasing the second hold display, the second hold display that was displayed second is shifted to the first display area, and the second hold display that was displayed third is the second display area Shift to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the winning prize command (design designation command, variable category command, second reserved memory number addition designation command) stored in the first storage area of the second starting prize command storage area. The final display mode designation data and the display change timing designation data) are deleted, and the contents of the second start winning prize command storage area are shifted (step S90668).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S90669), the effect control CPU 90101 uses a background screen in the effect display device 909 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a background screen with a blue background color). (Step S90670). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a normal state (low probability / low base state), a background screen corresponding to the normal state is displayed, thereby causing an effect mode (hereinafter, “ It is also controlled to “normal performance mode”. Next, if set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets a probability change state flag indicating the probability change state and a time reduction state flag indicating the time reduction state (step S90671).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction state background designation command (step S90672), the effect control CPU 90101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 909 as a background screen corresponding to the time reduction state (for example, a green diagonal line is drawn). Background screen) (step S90673). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the short-time state (low probability / high base state), a background screen corresponding to the short-time state is displayed, thereby providing an effect mode corresponding to the short-time state (hereinafter, short-time state). (Also referred to as production mode). Next, the output control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (step S90674).

  If the received effect control command is a probability change state background designation command (step S90675), the effect control CPU 90101 uses the background screen in the effect display device 909 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, a red diagonal line is drawn). Background screen) (step S90676). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variation state (high probability / high base state), a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state is displayed, thereby causing an effect mode (hereinafter, “ Also referred to as “probable change effect mode”. Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a probability variation state flag (step S90677).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S90678). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first executes a hold display control process for performing display control of the hold display (step S90800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs one of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S90801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (step S90801): Control is performed so that the variation of the effect symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S90802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S90802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S90803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S90803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception wait process (step S90800).

  Big hit display process (step S90804): After the end of the variable time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S90805).

  In-round processing (step S90805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S90806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S90807).

  Post-round processing (step S90806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S90805).

  Big hit end effect process (step S90807): In the effect display device 909, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

  86 to 87 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process (step S90800A). In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not the customer waiting demonstration display is in progress (step S906000). Whether or not the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed is, for example, that the effect symbol variation display is not being performed (for example, the value of the variation time timer set in the effect symbol variation start process is 0), and the first hold By confirming that neither the memory nor the second reserved memory is present (for example, both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number updated in steps S9066, S90659, S90662, and S90666 are 0). Can be judged. If the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed, the hold display control process is terminated. In other words, even if a new start win occurs during the customer waiting demonstration display, since the variable display is started immediately and there is almost no time for displaying the hold display, the process of displaying the hold display after step S906001 is not performed. The process is terminated as it is (without displaying the hold display).

  Note that even when the effect symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, there is neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory, and the remaining time of the variable display being executed is very short and immediately before the end of the variable display (for example, the remaining Even if it is within 1 second), even if a new start win occurs, there is substantially no time for displaying the hold display, so the process of displaying the hold display after step S906001 is not performed (hold) You may make it complete | finish a process as it is, without displaying a display.

  Also, for example, the customer waiting demonstration display is not started immediately after stopping the variation display of the production symbol, but the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed after a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the last variation display was finished. If it is configured to start, since it is a period during which the display is not held and the variable display is not executed during the predetermined period, it is determined as Y in step S906000, and the process is ended as it is. Also good.

  When the customer waiting demonstration is being displayed and it is determined as Y in step S906000 and the hold display control process is terminated, a hold memory number addition designation command (first hold memory number addition designation command, second hold memory number addition designation). Command) is not incremented even if a command is received, a subsequent subtraction designation command (first subtraction memory number subtraction designation command, second subtraction memory number subtraction designation command) is received. Then, control is performed so as not to delete the hold display without executing the processing of steps S90663 and S90667 of the command analysis processing. In this case, for example, if it is determined in step S90655 or S90658 of the command analysis process that it is determined that a new pending storage number addition designation command has been received, it is confirmed whether the customer waiting demonstration display is in progress. If a waiting demonstration is being displayed, a flag indicating that fact is set, and when a pending storage count subtraction designation command is received (see Y in steps S90661 and S90665), if that flag is set, step S90663 is set. , S90667 should not be executed. Further, in this case, not only the process of increasing / decreasing the hold display is skipped, but also the processes of steps S90666, S90659, S90662, and S90666 are skipped, and the process of increasing / decreasing the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number itself. May also be omitted.

  Further, not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, the process of step S906000 is omitted, and even after the customer waiting demonstration is displayed, the process after step S906001 is executed, and when a new start winning is generated, the process is suspended. The display may be displayed. In this case, if the customer waiting demonstration is being executed, the customer waiting demonstration is terminated, and a new hold display is temporarily displayed by the processing in step S906001 and subsequent steps.

  If the customer waiting demonstration is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not a new start winning has occurred and a new start winning command has been received (step S906001). That is, it is confirmed whether or not a new start prize has occurred. Specifically, if a new first reserved storage addition designation command or second reserved storage addition designation command is stored in the first start prize command storage area or the second start prize command storage area shown in FIG. Thus, it can be determined that a new start prize has occurred.

  If a command for starting winning is newly received (Y in step S906001), the effect control CPU 90101 finally displays the specific display (that is, hold display and active display) corresponding to the variable display based on the new starting winning. A display mode is determined (step S906002).

  In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a display change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display (that is, the hold display and the active display) corresponding to the variable display. Further, the final display mode indicates in what display mode the specific display corresponding to the variable display is finally displayed. Therefore, when the final display mode is determined to be the normal mode in step S906002, the display mode is not changed in the normal mode and the display change effect is not executed, and the final display mode is different from the normal mode. When the mode is determined, a display change effect is executed.

  In this form example, the display change effect has a display form different from the normal form from the beginning without displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display (that is, the hold display and the active display) once in the normal form. This includes what to display. Therefore, it can be said that the display change effect is an effect of displaying the specific display corresponding to the variable display (that is, the hold display and the active display) in a display mode different from the normal mode.

  In step S906002, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a lottery process using the final display mode determination table based on the newly received variation category command to determine the final display mode.

  FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a final display mode determination table. In the final display mode determination table, determination items (“normal mode (white)”, “first special mode (blue)”, “second special mode (green)”, and “third special mode (red) In the example shown in FIG. 87 in which determination values are assigned to each of “)”), the ratio of assigned determination values is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for final display mode determination, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 87, the determination items (“normal mode (white)”, “first special mode (blue)”, “second special mode (green)”, and “third special mode ( The numerical value corresponding to “red)”) indicates the ratio (%) at which each decision item is selected.

  In this embodiment, determination values are actually assigned to the display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 88 in addition to the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 87, but the description will be simplified. The ratio of the judgment value assigned for this purpose is shown. Also in step S906004, which will be described later, in which these tables are used, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining display change timing, and a determination value that matches the extracted random number is obtained, as in step S906002. Decide what is assigned.

  In the example shown in FIG. 87, in the final display mode determination table, when it is determined that the non-reach out of the variable category command (non-reach CA2′-1), the normal reach out of the variable category command (for example, normal CA2′-4). , CA2′-5, CA2′-6), it is determined that the normal reach big hit (for example, normal CA3-1, CA3′-2, CA3′-3) is detected, the superreach is shifted (for example, super When it is determined that it will be CA2′-7), a determination value is assigned when it is determined that it will be a super reach big hit (for example, super CA3′-3). In this example, it is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started. Although the variation pattern type indicated by the command may not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display, the variation pattern types of at least non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7 and super CA3′-3. Since a common determination value is assigned regardless of the total number of pending storages (see FIGS. 57 and 58), there is no difference between the determination result at the time of winning and the variation pattern type of the variation display actually executed. There is no matching. Therefore, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2′-1, super CA2′-7 or super CA3′-3, the display change effect is executed only for the variation display determined at the time of winning. Also good.

  As shown in FIG. 87, in this embodiment, a specific display corresponding to the variable display (that is, the hold display and the active display) can be displayed by the first to third special modes as the display mode other than the normal mode. . Specifically, blue hold display or active display (for example, blue round display) is displayed as the first display mode, and green hold display or active display (for example, green round display) is displayed as the second display mode. ) And a red hold display or active display (for example, a red round display) is displayed as the third display mode. In this embodiment, the normal mode hold display or active display is white (for example, white round display).

  In the final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 87, what is characteristic is that the variation category including the super reach is larger than the variation category not including the super reach, and that the display result is larger than the loss. That is, the determination value is set so that the ratio determined other than “normal mode (white)” is high. Further, the variation category including the super reach than the variation category not including the super reach, and the case where the display result is a big hit rather than the loss is the “second special embodiment” rather than the “first special embodiment”. The determination value is set such that the ratio determined as the “third special mode” is higher than the “second special mode”. By having such a feature, when the display change effect is not executed (that is, when the final display mode is “normal mode (white)”), when it is executed (that is, when the final display mode is In the case of “not normal mode (white)”, the final display mode is “second special mode” rather than “first special mode”, and “third special mode” than “second special mode”. Therefore, it is possible to increase the rate at which an advantageous design pattern variation mode (for example, develops into super reach) and to increase the rate at which the display result is a big hit. In other words, the “second special mode” is higher than the “first special mode”, and the “third special mode” is a display mode with higher expectation than the “second special mode”. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the execution of the display change effect, and to pay attention to which display mode is used for display.

  In step S906002, when the final display mode is not determined to be the non-normal mode (that is, when the final display mode is determined to be the normal mode and the display change effect is not executed) (N in step S906003), for effect control The CPU 90101 displays a hold display corresponding to a new start prize in a normal manner (step S906008). In step S906008 (and step S906006, which will be described later), when the first hold memory addition designation command is received, the first hold display is newly displayed and the second hold memory addition designation command is received. If so, the second hold display is newly displayed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S906002 that the final display mode is the non-normal mode (that is, when the final display mode is determined as one of the first to third special modes and the display change effect is executed), In step S906003, the effect control CPU 90101 determines the display change timing indicating the execution timing of the display change effect (step S906004).

  In step S906004, the effect control CPU 90101 performs a lottery process using the display change timing determination table based on the newly received variation category command to determine the display change timing.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a display change timing table. In the display change timing table, items to be determined for each variation category ("first timing (at the time of winning)", "second timing (at the start of target variation)" and "third timing (during the target variation super reach)") Each is assigned a judgment value.

  In this embodiment, the first timing (at the time of winning) is a timing for displaying a new hold display based on the occurrence of the start winning. When the display change effect is executed at the first timing, in step S906006, which will be described later, the hold display newly displayed based on the occurrence of the start winning is based on the final display mode (non-normal mode) determined in step S906002. Is displayed.

  The second timing (at the start of target variation) is the timing at which variation display is started based on the occurrence of a start winning prize. When the display change effect is executed at the second timing, the active display corresponding to the variable display is changed to the final display mode (non-normal mode) determined in step S906002 at the start of the target variable display. Is done.

  In addition, the third timing (during the target variation super reach) is a timing at which the super reach effect is executed in the variation display executed based on the occurrence of the start winning. When the display change effect is executed at the third timing, in the target variable display, the active display corresponding to the variable display during the execution of the super reach effect is the final display mode (non-normal mode) determined in step S906002. ) Is displayed.

  Hereinafter, among the display change effects that change the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the variable display (displayed by a display mode different from the normal mode), the display mode is changed for the hold display (display different from the normal mode) What is displayed according to the mode) is also referred to as a hold display change effect, and what is changed in the display mode for the active display (displayed with a display mode different from the normal mode) is also referred to as an “active display change effect”.

  What is characteristic in the display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 88 is that the variation category including the super reach than the variation category not including the super reach, and that the display result is a big hit rather than the loss. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined as “second timing” is higher than “first timing” and “third timing” is higher than “second timing”. By having such a feature, when the execution timing of the display change effect is at the second timing, it is more at the third timing than when it is at the second timing. One can increase the rate at which the variation pattern of the effect design is advantageous (for example, develops into super reach), and the rate at which the display result is a big hit. That is, “second timing” is higher than “first timing”, and “third timing” is higher than “second timing”. Therefore, even if the display mode after the change is the same, the degree of expectation varies depending on the timing at which the display change effect is executed. Therefore, attention can be paid to the timing at which the display change effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, even if the display mode after the change is the same, the degree of expectation varies depending on the timing of the change. Note that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and the first timing may have the highest degree of expectation, or the second timing may have the highest degree of expectation.

  In this embodiment, the display change timing is determined based on the change category using the display change timing determination table shown in FIG. 88. For example, the display change timing is determined based on the final display mode determined previously. Thus, the display change timing may be determined. In this case, for example, when the final display mode is the third special mode, the display change timing is determined at a different rate depending on the final display mode, such as a higher rate determined at the third timing. A table to which determination values are assigned may be used.

  In step S906004, when the display change timing is determined to be the first timing (at the time of winning) (that is, when it is determined to execute the hold display change effect), the effect control CPU 90101 determines the final display mode determined in step S906002. Thus, a new hold display is displayed (step S906006).

  In step S906004, when the display change timing is determined to be other than the first timing (at the time of winning) (that is, when it is determined to execute the active display change effect), the final display mode indicating the final display mode determined in step S906002 is displayed. The display mode designation data and the display change timing designation data indicating the display change timing determined in step S906004 are stored in the start winning command storage area (step S906007). Note that the final display mode designation data and the display change timing designation data are referred to in an effect symbol variation start process to be described later, and are used to specify the content of the effect to be executed. Then, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the hold display corresponding to the new start winning prize in the normal mode (step S906008).

  In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs during the big hit game or when the first starting win occurs in the high base state, the symbol designation command and the variable category command are not transmitted, It is configured to limit execution (see steps S901215A to S901219A). Therefore, when only the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition designation command is stored as the command at the time of starting winning, and the symbol designation command and the variation category command are not stored, in step S906002, The final display mode is determined as the normal mode. That is, the execution of the display change effect is limited. Even in such a case, among the display change effects, the hold display change effect may be limited, and the active display change effect may be executable.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a start winning is generated during the customer waiting demonstration display, the hold display is not displayed, so that the processing after step S906001 is not executed and the display change effect is not executed, but the display change effect is not executed. Of these, the active display change effect may be executable. For example, when a start winning occurs during the customer waiting demonstration display, the final display mode is determined, and a customer waiting demonstration display change timing determination table provided separately from the display change timing determination table shown in FIG. The display change timing may be determined at either the second timing (at the start of target variation) or the third timing (at the time of super-reach of target variation). Also in this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation be higher at the third timing than at the second timing. Further, for example, by setting a determination value so that the ratio determined at the third timing is the same in the display change timing determination table during the customer waiting demonstration and the display change timing determination table shown in FIG. Regardless of whether or not the start prize is being displayed during the demonstration display, the expectation of the third timing can be made common.

  Further, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the hold display change effect is only at the time of start winning, and the execution timing of the active display change effect is at the start of the target variable display or at the time of super reach, but is not limited thereto. For example, it may be possible to execute at any timing, such as when the hold display is shifted, when the change starts, when the effect symbol changes rapidly, when reach is established, or during reach. Which timing is to be used may be determined by lottery. The timing for executing the hold display change effect and the timing for executing the active display change effect may be determined by separate lotteries. Further, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the execution timing.

  In this example, the display change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the variable display (displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode) is displayed as the period displayed as the hold display and the active display. However, the display mode may be changed stepwise according to the degree of expectation. For example, it may be configured to change in two stages during the period displayed as the hold display and further change into two stages during the period displayed as the active display. Also in this case, the degree of expectation may be different according to the change timing and the display mode after the change. For example, it may be realized by a configuration for determining a change pattern of a period displayed as a hold display and a period displayed as an active display at the start winning prize, and the period displayed as an active display changes at the start of fluctuation You may implement | achieve by the structure which determines a pattern.

  Further, not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, for example, only whether or not a big hit is determined based on the variable category command, and the final display mode and the display change timing are determined according to the specification result. You may comprise as follows. In this embodiment, the final display mode is determined only in the case of non-reach out, normal reach out, normal reach big hit, super reach out and super reach big hit, that is, the case where the display change effect is executed. In other cases, a display change effect may be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the hold display change effect, the effect mode when executed, the presence / absence of execution of the active display change effect, and the effect mode when executed are determined at the start winning prize. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, at the time of starting winning, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect, determine the effect mode in the case of executing, and at the start of the effect symbol change, whether to execute the active display change effect, You may make it determine the production | presentation aspect in the case of performing.

  In this embodiment, the final display mode and the display change timing are determined using separate tables. For example, a table (for example, display change) in which the final display mode and the display change timing are determined at once is used. You may make it determine with reference to the table which the determination value was allocated for every pattern in which the display mode in each possible timing (The display mode after a change when changing) was defined.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception wait process (step S90800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) (step S90813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is recovered (see step S9044). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the pattern command has been received, the production symbol variation start process is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Not started.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S90801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S908001). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S908001 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S908002). In other words, the processing of step S908002 is executed by the effect control CPU 90101, whereby the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90101, in step S908002, displays the chance symbol pattern (for example, “223” or “445” as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream). The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 90101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S908002, the effect control CPU 90101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 91 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. In the example shown in FIG. 91, when the received display result designation command indicates “ordinary big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 stops. A combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same even number as symbols is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates “probable big hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 displays 3 symbols as stop symbols. A combination of performance symbols arranged with the same odd number of symbols is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 90101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. Further, in this embodiment, when the probability variation big hit is reached, the left, middle and right are stopped and displayed with the odd numbered symbols aligned, so that the odd number symbols are likely to be the probability big hit. Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable symbol. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the normal big hit is made, the left middle right is stopped and displayed with the even symbols aligned, so it is recalled that the even symbols are not probable big hits (normally big hits). Such a symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a non-probable symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 executes an effect effect setting process for operating the effect LED movable member 9090 (step S908003a). In step S908003a, the effect control CPU 90101 performs lottery processing using the accessory effect determination table based on the variation pattern, and determines whether or not to execute the accessory effect, and the effect mode in the case of execution.

  FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the accessory effect determination table. In the accessory effect determination table, determination items (“No execution”, “Execution first effect mode”, “Execution second effect mode”, “Execution third effect mode” and “Execution” are shown for each variation pattern. A determination value is assigned to each “fourth effect mode”). If it is determined that “no execution”, the accessory effect is not executed.

  In this embodiment, the effect LED 9090a of the effect LED movable member 9090 is lit in blue as the effect effect in the first effect mode, and the effect LED movable member 9090 is moved by the first operation pattern (for example, low-speed right rotation). Control to operate. Further, as an effect effect in the second effect mode, the effect LED 9090a of the effect LED movable member 9090 is turned on in yellow, and the effect LED movable member 9090 is operated by a second operation pattern (for example, low-speed left rotation). I do. In addition, as an effect effect in the third effect mode, the effect LED 9090a of the effect LED movable member 9090 is lit in green, and the effect LED movable member 9090 is operated by a third operation pattern (for example, high-speed right rotation). I do. In addition, as the effect effect of the fourth effect mode, the effect LED 9090a of the effect LED movable member 9090 is lit in red, and the effect LED movable member 9090 is operated according to a fourth operation pattern (for example, high-speed left rotation). I do. In addition, it is not limited to the operation pattern shown in this embodiment, for example, the effect LED-movable member 9090 may be operated by an operation pattern in which the rotation direction and the rotation speed change in the middle, or the effect LED-movable member 9090 may be moved vertically and horizontally. Further, the lighting LED 9090a of the movable member 9090 with the lighting LED may be lit in another color or blinked, not limited to the lighting example shown in this embodiment.

  What is characteristic in the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 92 is that the variation pattern including the super reach is greater than the variation pattern not including the super reach, and the display result is a big hit rather than the loss. The proportion of execution of the accessory effect is high, and the “second effect mode” is higher than the “first effect mode”, the “third effect mode”, and the “third effect mode” than the “second effect mode”. The determination value is set so that the ratio determined as the “fourth effect mode” is high. By having such a feature, the second effect mode is more effective when the effect effect is performed than when the effect effect is not performed, and when the effect effect effect mode is the first effect mode. In some cases, it is more advantageous that the direction of the third effect mode is more advantageous than the time of the second effect mode, and that the fourth effect mode is more advantageous than the case of the third effect mode. For example, it is possible to increase the ratio of development to super reach) and to increase the ratio of the display result to be a big hit. That is, the degree of expectation is different depending on the production mode. Therefore, it can be noted that the effect effect is executed and the effect mode when it is executed.

  In the accessory effect determination table shown in FIG. 92, in the case of a super reach big hit, a determination value is assigned so as not to be determined as “no execution”, but the determination value is determined so as to be determined at a predetermined ratio. May be assigned. This is because, if it is configured such that an effect effect is always executed at the time of a super-reach big hit, a shift will be determined at that time when the role effect is developed without being executed.

  In step S908003a, when it is determined to execute the accessory effect (Y in step S908003b), the effect control CPU 90101 sets an accessory effect execution flag indicating that the accessory effect is executed (step S908003c). In step S908003c, in order to be able to specify the effect mode of the effect effect to be executed, the effect effect execution flag according to the effect mode of the effect effect may be set, or the effect effect execution is performed. Apart from the flag, data for specifying the effect mode of the effect to be performed may be stored.

  In this embodiment, the timing for executing the accessory effect according to the variation pattern is set in advance, and in the effect symbol variation processing described later, by referring to the variation pattern (or process table), Although the timing to perform is specified, it is not restricted to such a structure, You may make it determine the timing which performs an effect production by lottery. In this case, the degree of expectation may be different depending on the timing of executing the accessory effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether or not the display change timing designation data stored in the storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area is other than 0 (step S908004a). That is, it is confirmed whether or not to execute a display change effect (active display change effect) for active display.

  When executing the display change effect for the active display, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table corresponding to the change pattern and the display change effect setting (step S908004b). In step S908004b, a process table is selected according to the variation pattern and the content of the display change effect specified by the display change timing specification data and the final display mode specification data. The execution timing of the display change effect can be specified by referring to the display change timing designation data, and the display mode after the change can be specified by referring to the final display mode designation data.

  On the other hand, when the display change effect for the active display is not executed, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step S908005). Then, the process timer in the process data A of the selected process table is started (step S908006).

  FIG. 93 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 90101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 909 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to a change in the display screen (including active display) of the effect display device 909 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 93 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern. When it is determined to execute an effect such as a display change effect, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table corresponding to the effect to be executed. For example, even if the variation pattern is the same, since the control content of the effect device differs between when the display change effect is executed and when it is not executed, the corresponding process table is selected. In this embodiment, different process tables are selected according to the execution timing of the display change effect and the display mode after the change. Control in which the display mode of the active display is changed is realized by controlling the effect device based on the selected process table in the effect symbol changing process described later.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 90101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data A (display control execution data A, lamp control execution data A, sound number data A). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 9027) as an effect component is executed (step S908007). For example, a command is output to the VDP 90109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 909. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 9070 in order to output audio from the speaker 9027.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect pattern to be variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command, but the effect control CPU 90101 uses the change pattern command. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of corresponding variation patterns.

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S908008).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays an active display in the active display area 909F (step S8009a). In this embodiment, the active display is displayed in the same manner as the first hold display or the second hold display (however, the size is different in this embodiment). Further, when the hold display corresponding to the starting variable display is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode, the active display is displayed in the display mode. Specifically, when the hold display corresponding to the starting variable display is displayed in the first special mode (blue circle display), the active display is displayed in the first special mode (blue circle display). indicate.

  In this embodiment, when the display change effect for the active display is executed at the second timing (at the start of target change), the active display is temporarily displayed in the same manner as the hold display, and the change display is displayed. Although it changes to the final display mode after the start, it may be displayed in the final display mode at the timing of displaying the active display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S90802) (step S908010).

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example shown in this embodiment, and examples of effects during the change include, for example, step-up notice effects, group notice effects, chance zone effects, movable object notice effects, effect blade accessory notice effects, blackout effects, etc. It may be determined whether or not to execute, and the notice effect may be executed based on the determination result.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation process (step S90802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S908101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Further, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S908105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the accessory effect execution flag is set (step S908016), and if not set, proceeds to step S908110. Further, when the combination effect production execution flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not it is the timing to execute the combination production (step S908107). In this embodiment, the timing for executing the accessory effect is predetermined for each variation pattern. For example, by confirming the variation pattern and the elapsed time from the variation start time, or by confirming the process data It is possible to confirm whether or not it is time to execute the accessory effect.

  If it is time to execute the accessory effect (Y in step S908107), the effect control CPU 90101 controls the lighting of the effect LED 9090a mounted on the effect LED movable member 9090 according to the effect mode determined in the effect symbol variation start process. And controlling the operation of the effect LED movable member 9090 (step S908108). Specifically, the effect LED 9090a mounted on the effect LED movable member 9090 is turned on in blue, yellow, green or red, and the effect LED movable member 9090 is any one of the first to fourth operation patterns. Rotate according to In this example, the lighting control of the effect LED 9090a mounted on the effect LED movable member 9090 and the operation control of the effect LED movable member 9090 are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds or 10 seconds. Before the stop display of the effect symbol) Finished). For example, it is realized by setting a timer at the start of lighting control and operation control, and stopping the lighting control and operation control when time-out occurs.

  Further, the effect control CPU 90101 performs control for displaying an effect effect effect image (for example, an effect effect effect image 90201 shown in FIG. 96D) on the effect display device 909 in accordance with the mode of the effect LED 90 ( Step S908109).

  In step S908109, when the effect LED 9090a mounted on the effect LED movable member 9090 is in the blue lit state, a blue accessory effect effect image is displayed, and when the effect LED 9090a is in the yellow lit state, the yellow accessory effect An effect image is displayed. When the effect LED 9090a is in a green lighting state, a green effect effect effect image is displayed. When the effect LED 9090a is in a red lighting state, a red effect effect effect image is displayed. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect effect effect image on the effect display device 909 according to the aspect of the effect LED movable member 9090 (particularly, the effect LED 9090a) changed by the effect effect is also referred to as an effect effect effect.

  In this example, the effect effect effect image is displayed at a position overlapping the active display and the hold display (see FIG. 96D), but the active display and the hold display are displayed with priority. That is, in the display area of the effect display device 909, the active display and the hold display are displayed on the front side (front side, upper side) layer in the depth direction, and the rear side (back side, lower side) layer in the depth direction. A bonus effect image is displayed. In step S908109, when displaying an effect effect effect image, control may be performed to draw an effect effect image of a part that does not overlap with active display or hold display, or an effect effect effect image is rendered. After that, the active display or the hold display may be redrawn by superimposing on the accessory effect effect image. In this embodiment, the effect effect effect image can be viewed through the accessory effect effect image on the back side (back side, lower side) in the depth direction (for example, a background image). It is configured to be able to. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the active display and the hold display are configured to have low transparency (or not to transmit). The effect effect effect image has higher transparency than at least the active display and the hold display.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S908110), the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S90803) (step S908111).

  In this example, the effect production is executed by executing the process of step S908108. Then, by performing the process of step S908109, the combination effect display effect image is displayed on the effect display device 909 in accordance with the aspect of the movable member 9090 with effect LED (particularly the effect LED 9090a) changed by the effect effect. Object effect production is executed. Note that the display change effect for the active display is realized by executing the process of step S908105 to control the effect display device 909 to change the display mode of the active display.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the display change effect is performed by changing the active display or the hold display to the blue, green, or red display mode according to the expectation in the effect display device 909, and the effect effect effect is The effect display image of blue, yellow, green or red is displayed on the effect display device 909 according to the mode of the movable member 9090 with effect LED (particularly, the effect LED 9090a). That is, the active display, the hold display, and the accessory effect effect image may be displayed on the effect display device 909 in a manner in which colors are common. In addition, the effect effect effect image has high transparency and is displayed at a position overlapping the active display and the hold display. Therefore, for example, even when a red effect image and a white active display are displayed, when the active display is viewed through the red effect image, the active display color is displayed. May be mistaken for red. For example, when a yellow effect image and a blue active display are displayed, when the blue active display is viewed through the yellow effect image, the yellow and blue are displayed. There is a possibility that the color of the active display is misidentified as green. That is, there is a possibility that the degree of expectation indicated by the display change effect is mistaken. Further, for example, when a red effect image and a blue active display are displayed, when the blue active display is viewed through the red effect image, red and blue are displayed. , The active display may appear purple, which is not originally displayed, and may confuse the player.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the active display and the hold display with low transparency are configured to be displayed with priority over the accessory effect effect image. In other words, in the display area of the effect display device 909, the active display and the hold display are displayed on the front side (front side, upper side) layer in the depth direction, and the rear side (back side, lower side) layer in the depth direction is displayed. It is comprised so that an effect object effect image may be displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the contents indicated by each image (in this embodiment, the expected level indicated by the display mode) and to prevent the player from being confused.

  FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 90101 first deletes the active display in the active display area 909F (step S908300a). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S908301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S908305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S908304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed. Without proceeding to step S908305.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 checks whether or not the confirmation command reception flag is set (step S908301a), and if not, ends the processing. When the confirmed command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the confirmed command reception flag (step S908301b), and performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (out-of-line symbol or jackpot symbol). This is performed (step S908302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S908302 (that is, when the loss symbol is displayed) (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 proceeds to step S908311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets a stop symbol display flag (step S908304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S908305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 90101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data A (display control execution data A, lamp control execution data A, sound number) In accordance with data A, movable member control data A) effect device (effect display device 909 as effect component, various lamps as effect component, speaker 9027 as effect component, and movable member 9078 as effect component and effect Control of the blades 9079a and 9079b) is executed (step S908309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90804) (step S908310).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 resets a predetermined flag (step S908311). For example, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 90101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S90811 in FIG. 89, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, since the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, in the effect symbol variation stop process at the end of the variation, etc. It is desirable to reset or to reset in the jackpot end effect processing at the end of jackpot. Then, the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S908800) (step S908312).

  Next, specific examples of the active display change effect, the accessory effect, and the accessory effect effect will be described. FIG. 96 shows a case where an active display change effect in which the active display changes to the first special mode, an accessory effect in the second effect mode, and an effect effect effect corresponding to the effect effect is executed. .

  As shown in FIG. 96 (A), in the state where two first on-hold displays are displayed, when the change in effect design stops, the active display is erased from the active display area 909F. Then, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), one first hold display is deleted, and an active display is displayed in the active display area 909F, and a new effect design starts to change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), when the active display change effect is executed at the start of the change, the display mode of the active display is blue (in the example shown in FIG. 96 (C), the slanted pattern is a downward-sloping line). Change.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), when the effect effect is executed, the display mode of the effect LED 9090a mounted on the effect LED movable member 9090 is yellow (in the example shown in FIG. 96 (D), the right Control is performed so that the movable member 9090 with an effect LED operates according to the second operation pattern (low-speed left rotation). When the effect effect effect is executed along with the effect effect, an effect effect effect image 90201 of yellow (in the example shown in FIG. 96D, a diagonal line pattern rising to the right) is displayed on the effect display device 909. Is displayed. At this time, the accessory effect effect image and the active display and the hold display are displayed at the overlapping positions, but the active display and the hold display are displayed with priority over the accessory effect effect image 90201. That is, in the display area of the effect display device 909, the active display and the hold display are displayed on the front side (front side, upper side) layer in the depth direction, and the rear side (back side, lower side) layer in the depth direction. A bonus effect image 201 image is displayed.

  FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of an active display, a hold display, and an accessory effect effect image. FIG. 97 (A) shows a case where the active display and the hold display are displayed with priority over the effect effect effect image 90201 on the effect display device 909. FIG. 97 (B) shows a case where the effect display effect image 90201 is displayed with priority over the active display and the hold display on the effect display device 909. In both FIGS. 97A and 97B, the active display is displayed in blue (in the example of FIG. 97, a slanting pattern with a downward slope to the right), and the effect effect effect image 90201 is yellow (in the example of FIG. 97). , Diagonally upwards).

  In the example shown in FIG. 97A, it can be easily recognized that the active display is blue (downward slanted line pattern), and the hold display is white (solid color), and no misidentification occurs. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 97B, the active display and the hold display can be seen through the yellow-colored effect effect rendering image 90201 (in the example of FIG. 97, the diagonal line pattern rising to the right). , It cannot be easily recognized that the active display is blue (downward slanted line pattern) and the hold display is white (solid color). Further, when the blue active display is seen through the yellow effect image, yellow and blue may be mixed, and the color of the active display may be misidentified as green and excessively expected. That is, there is a risk of misrecognizing the degree of expectation indicated by the display change effect. In addition, when the white on-hold display is seen through the yellow effect image, the on-hold display looks yellow, which is not displayed in the on-hold display change effect, which may confuse the player. is there. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 97A, the active display and the hold display are configured to be displayed with priority over the accessory effect effect image 90201, resulting in misunderstanding and confusion for the player. I try to prevent that. 97A, the accessory effect effect image 90201 has a lower display area than the active display and the hold display, but has a larger display area and is provided near the effect display device 909. The displayed effect LED 9090a is displayed in correspondence with the emission color. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the display mode of the accessory effect effect image 90201.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96, 97, etc., a circular active display is displayed in the square active display area 909F, and the active display area 909F is displayed with priority over the accessory effect effect image 90201. However, similarly to the hold display, a hold display area corresponding to the active display area may be provided, and the hold display area may be displayed with priority over the accessory effect effect image 90201. Conversely, only the circular active display may be displayed without providing the square active display area 909F. Even in the case of such a configuration, the active display is displayed with priority over the effect effect effect image 90201, so that it is possible to prevent misunderstandings and confuse the player. The active display is preferably configured to have low transparency (or not to transmit). This is because even if the active display is preferentially displayed, there is a possibility that misunderstanding may occur if the actor effect effect image 90201 can be viewed through the active display. Similarly, it is desirable that the hold display has a low transparency (or does not allow transmission).

  In this embodiment, the active display and the hold display are configured to be displayed with priority over the accessory effect effect image. For example, only the active display is displayed with priority over the accessory effect effect image. Alternatively, only the hold display may be displayed with priority over the effect effect effect image. Moreover, you may make it display only what is displayed by the display aspect different from a normal aspect among active display and a hold | maintenance display over an effect effect effect image.

  Further, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the display change effect and the effect effect effect are executed independently or simultaneously, the active display, the hold display, and the effect effect effect are performed in the same manner. Although it is configured to display an image, for example, when one of the display change effect and the effect effect effect is executed alone and when it is executed simultaneously, the image display mode is changed. You may make it differ. Specifically, the active display and the hold display are displayed in such a manner that the brightness and brightness are higher when the display change effect is executed simultaneously with the accessory effect effect than when it is executed alone. May be. In addition, for example, when the effect effect effect is executed simultaneously with the display change effect (or the active display change effect of the display change effect), the effect effect image has a luminance compared to when it is executed alone. Alternatively, it may be displayed in a mode with low brightness (that is, the active display or the hold display displayed in a mode different from the normal mode is easily visible).

  Further, in this embodiment, the active display and the hold display are always displayed with priority over the effect effect effect image, but some effect modes of the effect effects of a plurality of effect modes are displayed. When an effect effect (for example, an effect effect with a very high expectation) is executed, the effect effect effect image may be displayed with priority over the active display and the hold display. . In other words, the image display priority may be changed according to the degree of expectation. In this case, it is desirable that the accessory effect effect image to be displayed with priority has a low transparency. The configuration in which the priority of image display (priority of effect effect effect image, active display, and hold display) changes according to the degree of expectation applies to the effect effect of multiple effects performed using a single accessory (For example, since the degree of expectation differs between the accessory effect of the first effect mode and the accessory effect of the second effect mode, the priority of the image display changes depending on which is executed) The present invention may be applied to a plurality of types of effect production performed using different types of features (for example, the degree of expectation in the first feature production using the first feature and the second feature production using the second feature). Therefore, the priority of image display changes depending on which is executed). Further, the priority of image display may be changed according to the degree of expectation suggested by the effect regardless of the mode and type of the effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect effect effect image is configured to be displayed at a position overlapping with the active display and the hold display. You may comprise so that an effect effect effect image may be displayed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a special effect (for example, an effect effect) is executed by a plurality of stages of effect modes (for example, first to fourth effect modes, see FIG. 92) with different expectations. The first image (for example, the effect effect effect image) can be displayed by the possible display means and the display mode corresponding to the special effect, and is different from the first image by the display modes in a plurality of stages with different expectations. Display means (for example, an effect display device 909) capable of displaying a second image (for example, active display or hold display) is provided. The display means can display the first image and the second image in a manner in which at least a part is superimposed (see FIGS. 96 and 97), and can display the first image and the second image in a common display manner. (Refer to FIG. 87 and FIG. 92. Display is possible by the display mode of the common colors of blue, green and red). The second image has a higher image display priority than the first image (see FIGS. 96 and 97). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the misrecognition of the contents (for example, the expectation level indicated by the display mode) indicated by each image, and to prevent the player from being confused.

  In this embodiment, as an example of the special effect, the effect LED movable member 9090 is operated (the lighting control of the effect LED 9090a mounted on the effect LED movable member 9090 and the operation control of the effect LED movable member 9090). Although the structure which performs an object effect is disclosed, it is not restricted to this, For example, as a special effect, a plurality of types of images having different degrees of expectation are possible in a specific area of a display means (for example, an effect display device 909). You may comprise so that the 1st image corresponding to a special effect may be displayed on the same display means (for example, effect display device 909). Further, for example, a second effect display device is provided, and as the special effect, a plurality of types of images having different degrees of expectation are possible in the second effect display device, and the first image corresponding to the special effect is displayed on the display means (effect display). Device 909) may be configured to display. Further, for example, as a special effect, a plurality of types of effect sounds having different degrees of expectation can be output, and a first image corresponding to the special effect is displayed on a display means (for example, an effect display device 909). Also good. That is, the special effect may be realized by performing control such as light emission control, operation control, image display control, and sound output control in the same or different effect device as the display means.

  In addition, as an example in which the first image and the second image can be displayed in a common display mode, in this embodiment, the active display and the hold display, and the accessory effect effect image are displayed in a common color (blue or green). However, instead of or in addition to the color, for example, an active display and a hold display, an effect effect effect image, and a display form having a common pattern, pattern, and design. Can be displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, there is provided a holding storage means (for example, a holding storage buffer) for storing a variable display that has not yet started as a holding storage, and the display means is stored in the holding storage means as a second image. A hold image (for example, a first hold display or a second hold display) corresponding to the hold storage can be displayed. With such a configuration, the priority of the image display is set higher than that of the first image, so that the visibility of the reserved image can be ensured.

  In this embodiment, the display means is configured to display a variable display first image (for example, active display) corresponding to the variable display being executed as the second image. With such a configuration, since the priority of image display is set higher for the variable display first image than the first image, the visibility of the variable display first image can be ensured.

  In this embodiment, as the second image, a hold image (for example, a first hold display or a second hold display) or a variable display first image (for example, active display) is displayed, and the first image (for example, a role is displayed). The image display priority is set higher than that of the object effect effect image). For example, in addition to or instead of the hold image and the variable display first image, the group notice effect image used in the notice effect or the pre-reading notice effect is used. Alternatively, some or all of various images such as the step-up notice effect image and the chance zone effect image may be set to have a higher image display priority than the first image. By configuring in this way, various images such as a group notice effect image, a step-up notice effect image, and a chance zone effect image are displayed in a manner common to the target image (for example, a manner in which colors and patterns are common). Even if there is, the visibility of the target image can be ensured.

  In this embodiment, the first image is configured to have higher transparency than the second image (for example, the effect effect effect image has higher transparency than the active display and the hold display). Yes. Therefore, the effect of production can be improved. For example, if the effect effect effect image is not transmitted (low transparency), the background image displayed on the back side (back side, lower side) layer in the depth direction than the effect effect effect image is displayed. If it becomes invisible and reduces the effect, but the transparency of the effect effect effect image is high and the background image can be visually recognized through the effect effect effect image, the effect of changing the background image, etc. Can be carried out effectively.

  Moreover, in this form example, it is comprised so that the movable body which can be operated (for example, the movable member 9090 with a production LED which can be rotated can be operated) is provided as an effect means. Therefore, the effect of production can be improved.

  In this embodiment, the effect LED corresponding movable member 9090 is controlled as an effect effect corresponding to the variable display being executed, but the effect effect corresponding to the variable display that has not been executed yet. (As a so-called pre-reading notice effect), the effect LED-attached movable member 9090 may be controlled. Also in this case, when executing the effect effect effect according to the effect effect effect, it is desirable to display the hold display and the active display with priority over the effect effect effect image.

  In addition to the example shown in this embodiment, a second movable member is provided in addition to the movable member 9090 with an effect LED, and a movable member effect for operating the second movable member can be executed and movable. A movable member effect effect image that gives a video effect to the member effect may be displayed on the effect display device 909. In this case, the priority of image display may be different between the accessory effect effect image corresponding to the movable member with effect LED 9090 and the movable member effect effect image corresponding to the second movable member. For example, when the movable member effect that operates the second movable member is an effect that has a higher expectation than the effect effect that operates the movable member 9090 with the effect LED, the active display and the hold display, the movable member effect effect The image display priority may be increased in the order of the image and the effect effect effect image. Further, when a plurality of effect effect images can be displayed, a specific effect effect image may have a higher image display priority than the active display and the hold display. Specifically, the movable member effect that operates the second movable member is a highly expected effect, and the priority of the image display is set in the order of the movable member effect effect image, the active display and the hold display, and the accessory effect effect image. You may make it high.

  Further, in this embodiment, the active display is displayed in the same manner (but different in size) as the first hold display or the second hold display, but partly or entirely with the first hold display or the second hold display. May display the active display in a common mode or in completely different modes. For example, the first hold display or the second hold display has the same color and pattern, and the active display is displayed in a different size and shape, or the first hold display or the second hold display has the same color and pattern, The active display may be displayed in a manner in which the operation is different.

Second embodiment example.
Hereinafter, a second embodiment as another embodiment will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, detailed description of the portions having the same configuration and processing as those of the above embodiments as other embodiments will be omitted, and different portions will be mainly described.

  In the second embodiment, an error notification image is displayed on the effect display device 909 as an error notification when an abnormality such as abnormal winning or a ball jam occurs.

  In this embodiment, an effect execution notification image is displayed on the effect display device 909 as an effect execution notification for notifying that a notification target effect (details will be described later) has been executed.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the effect effect, the effect effect effect, and the display change effect, a group notice effect, a chance zone effect, and a step-up notice effect are executed.

  The group notice effect is a notice effect in which a group of characters and the like appear. For example, it is determined whether or not the group notice effect is to be executed at the start of the effect symbol variation, and in the case of executing, it is realized by executing a process of displaying the group notice effect image on the effect display device 909 during the variation. Is done. The group notice effect suggests that the change is an advantageous design pattern change mode (for example, develops into super reach) and a big hit with different expectations.

  The chance zone effect is a pre-reading notice effect performed over a plurality of changes. For example, it is determined whether or not the chance zone effect is to be executed based on the start winning command at the time of the start winning prize, and if so, the chance zone effect image is displayed until the target variable display is finished. This is realized by executing the processing displayed on The chance zone effect suggests that the target variation display has an advantageous variation pattern (for example, develops into super reach) and a big hit with different expectations.

  The step-up notice effect is a notice effect in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. For example, whether or not to execute the step-up notice effect in the effect symbol variation start process is determined, and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined, and the process of displaying the step-up notice effect image on the effect display device 909 is executed according to the determination result. Is realized. The step-up notice effect suggests that the change is an advantageous design pattern change mode (for example, develops into super reach) or a big hit with different expectations.

  In this embodiment, an error notification image, an effect execution notification image, an accessory effect effect image, a hold display image (corresponding to the active display and hold display in the above embodiment), a group notice effect image, a chance zone effect image, and a step-up notice Priorities for displaying various images such as effect images are determined, and image display control in the effect display device 909 is performed based on the priorities.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating an example of Z values and the like of various images. FIG. 98A is a diagram exemplifying an image (image name) and an image size (image display area) corresponding to each effect and notification executed in the display area of the effect display device 909. As shown in FIG. 98A, when error notification is executed, an error notification image having an image size of “large” is displayed in the display area. In other words, error notification is executed using an error notification image having an image size “large”. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 98A, the effect execution notification is executed using the effect execution notification image of the image size “small”, and the effect effect effect image of the image size “large” is used. An effect is executed, a display such as a hold (hold display, active display) is executed using a display image such as a hold of an image size “small”, and a group notice effect is executed using a group notice effect image of an image size “large” Then, the chance zone effect is executed using the chance zone effect image having the image size “small”, and the step-up notification effect is executed using the step-up notice effect image having the image size “large”.

  The effect execution notification shown in FIG. 98 (A) is notification that the notification target effect has been executed. In this embodiment, step 5 (SU5) of the step-up notice effect, group notice effect, and accessory effect each correspond to the notification target effect. That is, in this embodiment, as the effect execution notification, when SU5 is executed, the fact that SU5 is executed is notified, and when the group notice effect is executed, the fact that the group notice effect is executed is notified. In the case where the accessory effect is executed, the fact that the accessory effect has been executed is notified.

  FIG. 98B is a diagram exemplifying the Z value set for each image shown in FIG. 98A. The RAM of the effect control microcomputer 90100 stores a Z value setting table in which the Z value of each image shown in FIG. 98 (A) is set. In the Z value setting table, as shown in FIG. 98B, the Z value of each image is set. The Z value indicates a layer for displaying an image. The smaller the Z value, the more the image is displayed on the front side (front side, upper side) layer in the depth direction. The higher the Z value, the rear side (back side, lower side) in the depth direction. An image is displayed on the layer. Therefore, for example, in FIG. 98B, when the error notification image with the Z value “0” and the chance zone effect image with the Z value “7” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the chance with the Z value “7” is displayed. An error notification image having a Z value “0” is displayed in front of the zone effect image. In addition, for example, when a group notice effect image with a Z value “6”, a chance zone effect image with a Z value “7”, and a step-up notice effect image with a Z value “8” are displayed in a superimposed manner, the Z value A chance zone effect image with a Z value of “7” is displayed in front of the step-up notice effect image with “8”, and a group notice effect image with a Z value of “6” is displayed in front of the chance zone effect image with a Z value of “7”. Is displayed. Note that the above-described images and Z values are examples. For example, the Z value of the decorative design (image of the variable display effect of the decorative design) is “9”, and the Z value of the background (background image) is “10”.

  Note that the Z value of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 98 (B) is notified when the notification number is 3 (when execution of three effects of SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is notified). When the order is third, the notification start order is 2 when the number of notifications is 2 or more (when the execution of two or more effects of SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is notified). When the number is “2”, the notification start order is first when the number of notifications is 1 or more (when the execution of one or more of the SU5, group notice effect, and accessory effect is notified). Sometimes “3”.

  53 and 100 are diagrams illustrating examples of various images. FIG. 99A shows an error notification image (an example). The error notification image shown in FIG. 99 (A) includes a pictogram image G1 that notifies that an error has occurred, and a character image G2 that notifies a message “Error has occurred! The error notification image display time (error notification notification time) may be, for example, 30 seconds. The display time of the error notification image may be varied depending on the type of error.

  The image size of the error notification image shown in FIG. 98 (A) is a display area that combines the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2. That is, the display area combining the display area of the pictogram image G1 and the display area of the character image G2 is “large”. The pictogram image G1 and the character image G2 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 99A, but are compared with other plural images (or without being compared with other plural images), and are images of error notification images. Anything that can be said to be “large” in size is acceptable. Note that an image whose image size falls within the upper predetermined number (for example, the fourth) may be referred to as an image size “large”, and an image that does not enter the upper predetermined number may be referred to as an image size “small”. In addition, an image whose ratio of the image size in the display area of the effect display device 909 is a predetermined ratio (for example, 30%) or more may be referred to as an image size “large”, and an image less than the predetermined ratio may be referred to as an image size “small”. Good.

  FIG. 99B shows an effect execution notification image (an example). The effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 99 (B) is a pictogram image G3 that notifies the executed notification target effect (step-up notice effect step 5 (SU5), group notice effect, and accessory effect) in an identifiable manner. Contains. The pictogram image G3 is a general term for a part or all of the pictogram image G3-1 to the pictogram image G3-3 (described later). For example, the display time of the effect execution notification image (the notification time of the effect execution notification) may be 20 seconds. Depending on the type of notification target effect, the display time of the effect execution notification image may be varied.

  The image size of the effect execution notification image shown in FIG. 98 (A) is the display area of the pictogram image G3. That is, the display area of the pictogram image G3 is “small”. The pictogram image G3 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 99B, and the image size of the effect execution notification image is “ Anything that can be said to be small is acceptable.

  FIG. 99D shows in detail the vicinity of the pictogram image G3 of FIG. 99B. In FIG. 99D, the pictogram image G3-1 is for reporting the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “3”. In FIG. 99 (D), pictogram image G3-2 notifies the second effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “2”. In FIG. 99 (D), the pictogram image G3-3 notifies the third effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 3, and the Z value is “1”. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 99D, a pictogram image G3-2 having a Z value “2” is displayed on the front surface of a pictogram image G3-1 having a Z value “3”, and a pictogram image G3 having a Z value “2” is displayed. A pictogram image G3-3 having a Z value “1” is displayed on the front side of -2.

  In FIG. 99 (E), pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 2, and the Z value is “3”. In FIG. 99 (E), the pictogram image G3-2 notifies the second effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 2, and the Z value is “2”. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99E, a pictogram image G3-2 having a Z value “2” is displayed in front of a pictogram image G3-1 having a Z value “3”. In FIG. 99 (F), pictogram image G3-1 notifies the first effect in the notification start order when the number of notifications is 1, and the Z value is “3”.

  FIG. 99C shows an accessory effect effect image (an example). The effect effect effect image shown in FIG. 99C includes an effect image G4 that gives a video effect to the effect effect. The display time of the effect effect effect image (execution time of the effect effect effect) may be, for example, 30 seconds. In addition, the accessory effect effect image may be configured to be displayed in the lower part of the display area of the effect display device 909, as in the first embodiment.

  The image size of the effect effect effect image shown in FIG. 98 (A) is the display area of the effect image G4. That is, the display area of the effect image G4 is “large”. The effect image G4 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 99C, and the image size of the effect effect effect image is compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images). Anything can be said to be “large”.

  FIG. 100A shows a display image (an example) of a hold or the like. The hold display image shown in FIG. 100 (A) includes a first hold display image G5, a second hold display image G6, and an active display image G7. The display time of the first hold display image G5 and the second hold display image G6 differs depending on the number of hold displays, the digestion time of each hold display (the display time of each variable display), and the like. The display time of the active display image G7 varies depending on the display time of variable display. The hold display image may include an image showing the active display area.

  The image size of the hold display image shown in FIG. 98 (A) is the display area obtained by combining the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7. It is. That is, the display area including the display area of the first hold display image G5, the display area of the second hold display image G6, and the display area of the active display image G7 is “small”. The first hold display image G5, the second hold display image G6, and the active display image G7 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 100A, but are compared with other images (or with other images). It is sufficient that the image size of the display image such as the hold can be said to be “small” without comparison.

  FIG. 100B shows a group notice effect image (an example). The group notice effect image shown in FIG. 100 (B) includes character images G8 constituting the group. The display time of the character image G8 (group notice effect execution time) may be, for example, 5 seconds. Depending on the character image G8 displayed in the group notice effect, the display time of the group notice effect image may be varied.

  The image size of the group notice effect image shown in FIG. 98 (B) is the display area of the character image G8. That is, the display area of the character image G8 is “large”. The character image G8 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 100B, and the image size of the group notice effect image is " Anything that can be said to be “large” is acceptable.

  FIG. 100C shows a chance zone effect image (an example). The chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 100 (C) includes a character image G9 for informing a message “chance !!” and a pictogram image G10 for informing that it is a chance. The chance zone effect image may include one of the character image G9 and the pictogram image G10. The display time of character image G9 and pictogram image G10 (execution time of chance zone effect) varies depending on the number of hold displays, the digestion time of each hold display (the display time of each variable display), and the like.

  The image size of the chance zone effect image shown in FIG. 98 (B) is a display area that combines the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10. That is, the display area combining the display area of the character image G9 and the display area of the pictogram image G10 is “small”. The character image G9 and the pictogram image G10 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 100C, but are compared with other plural images (or without being compared with other plural images). Any image size can be said to be “small”.

  FIG. 100D shows a step-up notice effect image (an example). The step-up notice effect image is a frame image G11 that is displayed last in step 1 (SU1), a frame image G12 that is displayed last in step 2 (SU2), a frame image G13 that is displayed last in step 3 (SU3), a step 4 (SU4) includes a frame image G14 that is displayed last, step 5 (SU5) includes a frame image G15 that is displayed last. That is, the display area is enlarged every time the step-up is performed. In the frame images G11 to G15, characters and the like are displayed according to SU1 to SU5, but are not shown. Note that the display time of each of the frame images G11 to G15 may be, for example, 1 second (thus, for example, 5 seconds when proceeding to SU5).

  The image size of the step-up notice effect image shown in FIG. 98 (B) is based on the display area of the frame image G15. That is, the display area of the frame image G15 is “large”. The frame image G15 is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 100D, and the image size of the step-up notice effect image is compared with other plural images (or not compared with other plural images). Anything can be said to be “large”.

  FIG. 101 is a conceptual diagram schematically showing layers of various images. In FIG. 101, the numbers on the Z axis are Z values. According to the setting of the Z value shown in FIG. 98 (B), as shown in FIG. 101, the error notification image having the Z value “0” is displayed on the foremost layer, and the effect having the Z value “1”. The execution notification image (third) is displayed on one layer behind the error notification image, and the effect execution notification image (second) having the Z value “2” is displayed on the back of one of the effect execution notification images (third). The effect execution effect image having the Z value “4” is displayed on the layer immediately behind the effect execution notification image (second) displayed on the layer and having the Z value “3”. The image is displayed on one layer behind the effect execution notification image (third), and the hold display image having the Z value “5” is displayed on one layer behind the effect effect effect image. Group notice effect image having “6” is one of the display images such as hold A chance zone effect image having a Z value of “7” is displayed on a layer behind the group notice effect image, and a step-up notice effect image having a Z value of “8” is displayed in the group layer effect image. It is displayed on the layer behind one.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating a display operation example in the display area of the effect display device 909. FIG. 102A shows the display operation in the effect display device 909 when the execution periods of the step-up notice effect (SU4), the chance zone effect, the group notice effect, the hold display, and the effect execution notification (group notice effect) overlap. An example is shown. FIG. 102B shows a step-up notice effect (SU5), a chance zone effect, a group notice effect, a hold display, an effect effect effect, an effect execution notice (SU5), an effect execution notice (group notice effect), and an effect execution. The example of a display operation in the production | presentation display apparatus 909 when the execution period of alerting | reporting (object effect production) overlaps is shown. As shown in FIGS. 102A and 102B, an image having a large Z value is drawn on the back side according to the Z value in FIG. 98B, and an image having a small Z value is on the near side. It is drawn to overlap.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and whether or not to control to the advantageous state. Determining means for determining whether or not, determining means for determining whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state prior to the determination by the determining means, and effect images (for example, various effect images shown in FIGS. 99, 100, etc.) Etc.) and an effect execution means for executing the effect. Then, the effect execution means uses a first effect image (for example, a step-up notice effect image or the like) as a notice effect that is executed based on the determination by the determining means, and a first notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect or the like). A second notice effect (for example, a chance zone effect or the like) using a second effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image or the like) can be executed as the notice effect to be executed based on the determination by the determination means. Also, the first effect image and the second effect image have different image display priorities (for example, as shown in FIG. 101, a chance zone effect image having a Z value of “7” has a Z value of “8”). It is configured to be displayed on the front side of the up notice effect image. Therefore, the effect image can be displayed suitably.

  In this embodiment, the effect execution means uses the first effect image (for example, a chance zone effect image) in the first region (region of image size “small” as shown in FIG. 98A). A second effect image (for example, a group notice effect) in one effect (for example, a chance zone effect) and a second area (an area having an image size “large” as shown in FIG. 98A) wider than the first area. A second effect (for example, a group notice effect) using an image or the like can be executed. Also, the first effect image and the second effect image have different image display priorities (for example, as shown in FIG. 101, a group notice effect image with a Z value “6” has a chance of a Z value “7”. (Displayed on the front side of the zone effect image). Therefore, the effect image can be displayed suitably.

  In this embodiment, the effect effect effect image is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 909 (specifically, a position that does not overlap with the display image such as the hold, or has a small overlapping portion). Similarly to the first embodiment, it may be configured to be displayed at the lower part of the display area of the effect display device 909 (specifically, the position such as the hold or the like that overlaps with the display image or where there are many overlapping parts). . However, in this case, similarly to the first embodiment, it is desirable that the display image such as the hold is set to have a higher image display priority than the accessory effect effect image.

  In addition, the effect effect described in this embodiment may be executed separately from the effect effect described in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, when distinguishing, the accessory effect demonstrated in the 1st form example is called a 1st accessory effect, and the accessory effect demonstrated in the 2nd form example is called a 2nd accessory effect. In this case, in the second embodiment, in addition to the movable member 9090 with the effect LED in the first embodiment, the movable member with the second effect LED having the same function as the movable member 9090 with the first effect LED. Is provided on the upper side of the effect display device 909. And as 2nd effect production, while performing the effect LED which the movable member with 2nd effect LED mounts by a predetermined aspect, control which operates the movable member with 2nd effect LED is performed. In addition, in accordance with the mode of the second accessory effect, the accessory that displays the accessory effect effect image (hereinafter referred to as the second accessory effect effect image when distinguished) as shown in FIG. 99 (C). An effect effect (hereinafter referred to as a second effect effect effect when distinguished) is executed. The second effect effect effect image displayed by the second effect effect effect is displayed at the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 909 as shown in FIG. The display may be moved to a position overlapping the display. Note that the accessory used for the second accessory effect is not limited to the same as the effect LED movable member 9090 shown in the first embodiment, but may be different in shape, function, operation mode, and the like. Good.

  In the case where the first and second effect effects are executed separately, that is, the first and second effect effects (second effect effect effects in the first embodiment) and second and second effect effects (second effect). In the case of executing separately from the accessory effect effect in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the accessory effect effect image (that is, the second accessory effect) displayed by the second accessory effect effect. The effect image) has a higher image display priority than the hold display image. On the other hand, as described in the first embodiment, the effect display effect image displayed by the first effect effect effect (that is, the first effect effect effect image) has priority over the display image such as the hold display image. The degree is low. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the second effect effect effect that has priority over the active display or the hold display and the first effect effect effect that prioritizes the active display or the hold display. Diversity of object effects can be provided. In the case of such a configuration, the second action effect effect (that is, the second effect effect) having a high priority is larger than the first effect effect effect (that is, the first effect effect). High expectations are desirable.

  Note that only one of the configurations shown in the above embodiments may be applied to a gaming machine, or a combination of some or all of the above configurations may be applied to a gaming machine. May be.

  Note that the structure shown in the above embodiment can also be applied to a game system called a so-called portable interlocking system. A gaming system called a mobile-linked system generally has a gaming machine that outputs predetermined information based on establishment of a predetermined condition, and a predetermined privilege for a player based on the predetermined information output by the gaming machine. A privilege granting device for performing the granting process.

  Specifically, in the gaming system as described above, the gaming machine has a predetermined condition such as the number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, the so-called consecutive resort number (the number of jackpots during the probability variation state), the number of mission achievements, etc. It is stored as a history, and a two-dimensional code or the like is displayed as predetermined information at the end of the game. Further, the player uses a mobile terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph the two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits it to a Web server (privilege granting device) on the Internet. Then, the Web server manages the game history of the player based on the received information, and performs a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history. For example, as a predetermined privilege, the Web server transmits digital content such as image content and music content to the player's mobile terminal, or transmits a predetermined password to the player's mobile terminal and the player next time When playing a game, the display screen of the gaming machine is processed so as to be customized according to the player's preference.

  When the configuration shown in the above embodiment is applied to the gaming system as described above, for example, it is assumed that a predetermined condition is established when a display change effect is executed and a big hit is made, and the number of times is played on the Web server. It may be managed as a history. Then, according to the number of times that the display change effect is executed and the number of wins, the digital content can be transmitted as a predetermined privilege, or the display screen of the gaming machine can be customized.

  In the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc. Although an example in which a variation pattern command is transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 90100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command to indicate whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc., before reaching reach (so-called if reach is not reached). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. Note that the game control microcomputer 90560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%. : B = 100%: This is a concept that includes those with different ratios (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. It may be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 909 and the like is mounted, and a circuit on which other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 9027 and the like) are mounted are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. However, the game control microcomputer 90560 is connected to another board (for example, in FIG. 52). The sound output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, or the like, or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 9070 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 9035). The command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 on the effect control board 9080 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070, the lamp driver board 9035, and the sound / lamp board, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 909. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 90560 in the above-described embodiment, and the sound output board 9070 and the lamp driver board. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from 9035 or the sound / lamp board.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set by inserting medals, and a plurality of types of symbols are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When a symbol is stopped in response to a stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, the predetermined number of medals will be applied to the slot machine to be paid out to the player. Is also possible.

  Moreover, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example. However, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, such as a game ball or the like. It is also possible to apply the present invention to an enclosed game machine that encloses the above game media and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, there is a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable state after the big hit game based on the fact that the big hit type is a probable big hit or a normal big hit, and the big hit type is determined to be a promising big hit. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball apparatus in which a predetermined probability changing area is provided (a certain variable winning ball apparatus may be provided in a single special variable winning ball apparatus, or a plurality of special variable winning balls may be provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration shown in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a probable state after completion.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. I can't catch it. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not it is a big hit and determines whether or not the variation pattern type is winning (pre-reading determination), and a command (symbol designating command, (Variable category command) is transmitted, and on the side of the effect control microcomputer 90100, the case of executing the pre-reading notice effect based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning is shown. You may comprise so that determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) may be performed in the production control microcomputer 90100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a command designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the time of starting winning. In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 90100 may be configured to make a winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on random number values specified by these commands.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 27 Speaker 31 Game control board (main board)
51 Sub-effect display device 56 CPU
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 70 Audio | voice output board | substrate 560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP
901 Pachinko machine 908a First special symbol display 908b Second special symbol display 909 Production display device 909a First reserved memory display unit 909b Second reserved memory display unit 909F Active display area 9013 First start prize opening 9014 Second start Prize opening 9020 Special variable winning ball device 9031 Game control board (main board)
9056 CPU
90560 Microcomputer for game control 9078 Movable member 9080 Production control board 9090 Movable member with production LED 90100 Microcomputer for production control 90101 CPU for production control
90109 VDP

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing a game,
A special performance execution means capable of executing a special performance in a plurality of stages of production with different expectations;
Display means capable of displaying a first image in a display mode corresponding to the special effect and capable of displaying a second image different from the first image in a plurality of display modes having different degrees of expectation;
During execution of a predetermined effect that displays a predetermined image, a specific image effect that displays a specific image superimposed on the front side of the predetermined image in a state in which the visibility of the predetermined image is reduced An image effect execution means, wherein the display means can display the first image and the second image in a manner that at least a part thereof is superimposed,
The second image is set to have a higher image display priority than the first image,
The gaming machine can display identification information on the front side of the specific image.